]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
Merge from emacs-24; up to 2012-04-20T05:47:55Z!eliz@gnu.org
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @syncodeindex vr cp
8 @syncodeindex fn cp
9 @finalout
10
11 @c ---------
12 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
13 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
14 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
15 @set smallbook
16 @ifset smallbook
17 @smallbook
18 @clear largebook
19 @end ifset
20 @set print-postscript-figures
21 @c set largebook
22 @c clear print-postscript-figures
23 @c ---------
24
25 @comment %**end of header
26
27 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
28 @c save on paper cost.
29 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
30 @tex
31 @ifset smallbook
32 @fonttextsize 10
33
34 @end ifset
35 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
36 @end tex
37
38 @set edition-number 3.10
39 @set update-date 28 October 2009
40
41 @ignore
42 ## Summary of shell commands to create various output formats:
43
44 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
45 ## pushd /u/intro/
46
47 ## Info output
48 makeinfo --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
49
50 ## ;; (progn (when (bufferp (get-buffer "*info*")) (kill-buffer "*info*")) (info "/usr/local/src/emacs/info/eintr"))
51
52 ## DVI output
53 texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
54
55 ## xdvi -margins 24pt -topmargin 4pt -offsets 24pt -geometry 760x1140 -s 5 -useTeXpages -mousemode 1 emacs-lisp-intro.dvi &
56
57 ## HTML output
58 makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
59
60 ## galeon emacs-lisp-intro.html
61
62 ## Plain text output
63 makeinfo --fill-column=70 --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
64 --verbose --no-headers --output=emacs-lisp-intro.txt emacs-lisp-intro.texi
65
66 popd
67
68 # as user `root'
69 # insert thumbdrive
70 mtusb # mount -v -t ext3 /dev/sda /mnt
71 cp -v /u/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi /mnt/backup/intro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
72 umtusb # umount -v /mnt
73 # remove thumbdrive
74
75 ## Other shell commands
76
77 pushd /usr/local/src/emacs/lispintro/
78 ## pushd /u/intro/
79
80 ## PDF
81 texi2dvi --pdf emacs-lisp-intro.texi
82 # xpdf emacs-lisp-intro.pdf &
83
84 ## DocBook -- note file extension
85 makeinfo --docbook --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
86 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.docbook emacs-lisp-intro.texi
87
88 ## XML with a Texinfo DTD -- note file extension
89 makeinfo --xml --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 \
90 --verbose --output=emacs-lisp-intro.texinfoxml emacs-lisp-intro.texi
91
92 ## PostScript (needs DVI)
93 # gv emacs-lisp-intro.ps &
94 # Create DVI if we lack it
95 # texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
96 dvips emacs-lisp-intro.dvi -o emacs-lisp-intro.ps
97
98 ## RTF (needs HTML)
99 # Use OpenOffice to view RTF
100 # Create HTML if we lack it
101 # makeinfo --no-split --html emacs-lisp-intro.texi
102 /usr/local/src/html2rtf.pl emacs-lisp-intro.html
103
104 ## LaTeX (needs RTF)
105 /usr/bin/rtf2latex emacs-lisp-intro.rtf
106
107 popd
108
109 @end ignore
110
111 @c ================ Included Figures ================
112
113 @c Set print-postscript-figures if you print PostScript figures.
114 @c If you clear this, the ten figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams.
115 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
116 @c Your site may require editing changes to print PostScript; in this
117 @c case, search for `print-postscript-figures' and make appropriate changes.
118
119 @c ================ How to Create an Info file ================
120
121 @c If you have `makeinfo' installed, run the following command
122
123 @c makeinfo emacs-lisp-intro.texi
124
125 @c or, if you want a single, large Info file, and no paragraph indents:
126 @c makeinfo --no-split --paragraph-indent=0 --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
127
128 @c After creating the Info file, edit your Info `dir' file, if the
129 @c `dircategory' section below does not enable your system to
130 @c install the manual automatically.
131 @c (The `dir' file is often in the `/usr/local/share/info/' directory.)
132
133 @c ================ How to Create an HTML file ================
134
135 @c To convert to HTML format
136 @c makeinfo --html --no-split --verbose emacs-lisp-intro.texi
137
138 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
139
140 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
141 @c In the above header, set @-commands appropriately.
142
143 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
144 @c @smallbook
145 @c @clear largebook
146
147 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
148 @c @c smallbook
149 @c @set largebook
150
151 @c European A4 size paper:
152 @c @c smallbook
153 @c @afourpaper
154 @c @set largebook
155
156 @c ================ How to Typeset and Print ================
157
158 @c If you do not include PostScript figures, run either of the
159 @c following command sequences, or similar commands suited to your
160 @c system:
161
162 @c texi2dvi emacs-lisp-intro.texi
163 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
164
165 @c or else:
166
167 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
168 @c texindex emacs-lisp-intro.??
169 @c tex emacs-lisp-intro.texi
170 @c lpr -d emacs-lisp-intro.dvi
171
172 @c If you include the PostScript figures, and you have old software,
173 @c you may need to convert the .dvi file to a .ps file before
174 @c printing. Run either of the following command sequences, or one
175 @c similar:
176 @c
177 @c dvips -f < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
178 @c
179 @c or else:
180 @c
181 @c postscript -p < emacs-lisp-intro.dvi > emacs-lisp-intro.ps
182 @c
183
184 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
185 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of `pageno' below.)
186
187 @c ================ End of Formatting Sections ================
188
189 @c For next or subsequent edition:
190 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
191 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
192 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
193
194 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
195 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
196 @ifset largebook
197 @tex
198 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
199 @end tex
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
203 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
204
205 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
206 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
207
208 @tex
209 \if \xrefprintnodename
210 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
211 \else
212 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
213 \fi
214 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
215 @end tex
216
217 @c ----------------------------------------------------
218
219 @dircategory GNU Emacs Lisp
220 @direntry
221 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr).
222 A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
223 @end direntry
224
225 @copying
226 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
227 people who are not programmers.
228 @sp 1
229 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
230 @sp 1
231 Copyright @copyright{} 1990-1995, 1997, 2001-2012 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
232 @sp 1
233
234 @iftex
235 Published by the:@*
236
237 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.fsf.org/campaigns/gnu-press/}@*
238 a division of the @hfill email: @email{sales@@fsf.org}@*
239 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
240 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
241 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
242 @end iftex
243
244 @ifnottex
245 Published by the:
246
247 @example
248 GNU Press, http://www.fsf.org/campaigns/gnu-press/
249 a division of the email: sales@@fsf.org
250 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
251 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
252 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
253 @end example
254 @end ifnottex
255
256 @sp 1
257 @c Printed copies are available from @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/} for $35 each.@*
258 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
259
260 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
261 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
262 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
263 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
264 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
265 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
266 Documentation License''.
267
268 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
269 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
270 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
271 @end copying
272
273 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use `shorttitlepage'
274 @tex
275 {\begingroup%
276 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
277 \endgroup}%
278 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
279 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
280 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
281 @end tex
282
283 @titlepage
284 @sp 6
285 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
286 @sp 2
287 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
288 @sp 2
289 @center Revised Third Edition
290 @sp 4
291 @center by Robert J. Chassell
292
293 @page
294 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
295 @insertcopying
296 @end titlepage
297
298 @iftex
299 @headings off
300 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
301 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
302 @end iftex
303
304 @ifnothtml
305 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
306 @ifset largebook
307 @tex
308 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
309 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
310 @end tex
311 @end ifset
312 @end ifnothtml
313
314 @shortcontents
315 @contents
316
317 @ifnottex
318 @node Top, Preface, (dir), (dir)
319 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
320
321 @insertcopying
322
323 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
324 every node in every chapter.
325 @end ifnottex
326
327 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
328
329 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
330 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
331 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
332
333 @c iftex
334 @c global@pageno = -11
335 @c end iftex
336
337 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
338 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
339
340 @menu
341 * Preface:: What to look for.
342 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
343 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
344 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
345 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
346 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
347 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
348 a region.
349 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
350 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
351 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
352 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
353 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
354 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
355 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
356 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
357 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
358 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
359 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
360 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
361 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
362 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
363 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
364 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
365 * GNU Free Documentation License::
366 * Index::
367 * About the Author::
368
369 @detailmenu
370 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
371
372 Preface
373
374 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
375 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
376 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
377 * Lisp History::
378 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
379 * Thank You::
380
381 List Processing
382
383 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
384 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
385 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
386 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
387 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
388 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
389 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
390 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
391 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
392 * Summary:: The major points.
393 * Error Message Exercises::
394
395 Lisp Lists
396
397 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
398 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
399 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
400 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
401
402 The Lisp Interpreter
403
404 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
405 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
406
407 Evaluation
408
409 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
410 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
411
412 Variables
413
414 * fill-column Example::
415 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
416 without a function.
417 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
418
419 Arguments
420
421 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
422 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
423 of a variable or list.
424 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
425 variable number of arguments.
426 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
427 to a function.
428 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
429
430 Setting the Value of a Variable
431
432 * Using set:: Setting values.
433 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
434 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
435
436 Practicing Evaluation
437
438 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
439 causes evaluation.
440 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
441 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
442 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
443 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
444 the buffer.
445 * Evaluation Exercise::
446
447 How To Write Function Definitions
448
449 * Primitive Functions::
450 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
451 * Install:: Install a function definition.
452 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
453 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
454 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
455 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
456 * if:: What if?
457 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
458 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
459 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
460 * Review::
461 * defun Exercises::
462
463 Install a Function Definition
464
465 * Effect of installation::
466 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
467
468 Make a Function Interactive
469
470 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
471 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
472
473 @code{let}
474
475 * Prevent confusion::
476 * Parts of let Expression::
477 * Sample let Expression::
478 * Uninitialized let Variables::
479
480 The @code{if} Special Form
481
482 * if in more detail::
483 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
484
485 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
486
487 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
488
489 @code{save-excursion}
490
491 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
492 * Template for save-excursion::
493
494 A Few Buffer--Related Functions
495
496 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
497 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
498 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
499 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
500 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
501 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
502 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
503 * Buffer Exercises::
504
505 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
506
507 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
508 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
509
510 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
511
512 * append-to-buffer overview::
513 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
514 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
515 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
516
517 A Few More Complex Functions
518
519 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
520 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
521 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
522 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
523 * Second Buffer Related Review::
524 * optional Exercise::
525
526 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
527
528 * insert-buffer code::
529 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
530 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
531 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
532 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
533 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
534 * New insert-buffer::
535
536 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
537
538 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
539 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
540
541 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
542
543 * Optional Arguments::
544 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
545 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
546
547 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
548
549 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
550 * Large buffer case::
551 * Small buffer case::
552
553 Narrowing and Widening
554
555 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
556 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
557 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
558 * narrow Exercise::
559
560 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
561
562 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
563 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
564 * cons:: Constructing a list.
565 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
566 * nth::
567 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
568 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
569 * cons Exercise::
570
571 @code{cons}
572
573 * Build a list::
574 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
575
576 Cutting and Storing Text
577
578 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
579 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
580 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
581 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
582 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
583 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
584 * cons & search-fwd Review::
585 * search Exercises::
586
587 @code{zap-to-char}
588
589 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
590 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
591 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
592 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
593 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
594 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
595
596 @code{kill-region}
597
598 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
599 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
600 * Lisp macro::
601
602 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
603
604 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
605 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
606
607 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
608
609 * last-command & this-command::
610 * kill-append function::
611 * kill-new function::
612
613 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
614
615 * See variable current value::
616 * defvar and asterisk::
617
618 How Lists are Implemented
619
620 * Lists diagrammed::
621 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
622 * List Exercise::
623
624 Yanking Text Back
625
626 * Kill Ring Overview::
627 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
628 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
629
630 Loops and Recursion
631
632 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
633 * dolist dotimes::
634 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
635 * Looping exercise::
636
637 @code{while}
638
639 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
640 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
641 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
642 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
643 * Incrementing Loop Details::
644 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
645
646 Details of an Incrementing Loop
647
648 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
649 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
650 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
651
652 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
653
654 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
655 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
656 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
657
658 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
659
660 * dolist::
661 * dotimes::
662
663 Recursion
664
665 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
666 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
667 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
668 * Recursive triangle function::
669 * Recursion with cond::
670 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
671 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
672 * No deferment solution::
673
674 Recursion in Place of a Counter
675
676 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
677 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
678
679 Recursive Patterns
680
681 * Every::
682 * Accumulate::
683 * Keep::
684
685 Regular Expression Searches
686
687 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
688 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
689 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
690 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
691 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
692 * Regexp Review::
693 * re-search Exercises::
694
695 @code{forward-sentence}
696
697 * Complete forward-sentence::
698 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
699 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
700
701 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
702
703 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
704 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
705 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
706
707 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
708
709 * Why Count Words::
710 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
711 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
712 * Counting Exercise::
713
714 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
715
716 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
717 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
718
719 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
720
721 * Divide and Conquer::
722 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
723 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
724 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
725 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
726 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
727 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
728 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
729 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
730 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
731
732 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
733
734 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
735 * append:: Attach one list to another.
736
737 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
738
739 * Data for Display in Detail::
740 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
741 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
742 * Counting function definitions::
743
744 Readying a Graph
745
746 * Columns of a graph::
747 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
748 * recursive-graph-body-print::
749 * Printed Axes::
750 * Line Graph Exercise::
751
752 Your @file{.emacs} File
753
754 * Default Configuration::
755 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
756 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
757 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
758 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
759 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
760 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
761 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
762 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
763 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
764 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
765 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
766 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
767 * Miscellaneous::
768 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
769
770 Debugging
771
772 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
773 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
774 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
775 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
776 * Debugging Exercises::
777
778 Handling the Kill Ring
779
780 * What the Kill Ring Does::
781 * current-kill::
782 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
783 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
784 * ring file::
785
786 The @code{current-kill} Function
787
788 * Code for current-kill::
789 * Understanding current-kill::
790
791 @code{current-kill} in Outline
792
793 * Body of current-kill::
794 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
795 * Determining the Element::
796
797 A Graph with Labeled Axes
798
799 * Labeled Example::
800 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
801 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
802 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
803 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
804
805 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
806
807 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
808 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
809 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
810 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
811 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
812 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
813
814 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
815
816 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
817 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
818
819 Printing the Whole Graph
820
821 * The final version:: A few changes.
822 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
823 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
824 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
825 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
826 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
827 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
828
829 @end detailmenu
830 @end menu
831
832 @node Preface, List Processing, Top, Top
833 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
834 @unnumbered Preface
835
836 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
837 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
838 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
839 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
840 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
841 extension to the editor.
842
843 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
844 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
845 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
846 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
847 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
848 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
849 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
850 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
851
852 @menu
853 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
854 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
855 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
856 * Lisp History::
857 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
858 * Thank You::
859 @end menu
860
861 @node Why, On Reading this Text, Preface, Preface
862 @ifnottex
863 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
864 @end ifnottex
865
866 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
867 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
868 you would any other programming language.
869
870 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
871 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
872 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
873 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
874 can teach yourself to go further.
875
876 @node On Reading this Text, Who You Are, Why, Preface
877 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
878 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
879
880 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
881 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
882 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
883 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
884 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
885 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
886 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
887 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
888 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
889 there.
890
891 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
892 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
893 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
894 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
895 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
896 implemented.
897 Also, I
898 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
899 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
900 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
901
902 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
903 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
904 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
905 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
906 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
907 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
908 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
909 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
910 around your home town.
911
912 @ignore
913 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
914 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
915 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
916 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
917 `just for teaching purposes'; what you see is used. This is a great
918 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
919 @end ignore
920
921 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
922 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
923 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
924 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
925 advantage.
926
927 @node Who You Are, Lisp History, On Reading this Text, Preface
928 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
929 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
930
931 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
932 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
933 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
934 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
935
936 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
937
938 @quotation
939 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
940 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
941
942 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
943 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
944 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
945 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
946 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
947 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
948 @end quotation
949
950 This introduction is not written for this person!
951
952 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
953 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
954 different context, or to review it.
955
956 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
957 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
958 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
959 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
960 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
961 information is formally introduced.)
962
963 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
964 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a `nodding
965 acquaintance' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
966 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
967 what is important, and concentrate on it.
968
969 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
970 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
971 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
972 as a daunting mountain.
973
974 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
975 document,
976 @iftex
977 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
978 @end iftex
979 @ifnottex
980 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
981 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
982 @end ifnottex
983 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
984 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
985 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
986 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
987 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
988 when you are writing your own programs.
989
990 @node Lisp History, Note for Novices, Who You Are, Preface
991 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
992 @cindex Lisp history
993
994 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
995 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
996 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
997 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
998
999 @cindex Maclisp
1000 @cindex Common Lisp
1001 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
1002 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
1003 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
1004 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
1005 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
1006
1007 @node Note for Novices, Thank You, Lisp History, Preface
1008 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1009 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
1010
1011 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
1012 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
1013 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
1014 Emacs with the on-line tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
1015 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
1016 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
1017
1018 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
1019 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
1020 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
1021 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
1022 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
1023 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
1024 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
1025 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
1026 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
1027 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
1028 @key{ALT}.)
1029 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
1030 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
1031 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
1032 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
1033 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
1034 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
1035 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
1036 press the @key{\} key.
1037
1038 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
1039 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the `universal argument'. The
1040 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
1041 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
1042 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
1043 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
1044 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
1045 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
1046
1047 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
1048 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
1049 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
1050
1051 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
1052 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
1053 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
1054
1055 @node Thank You, , Note for Novices, Preface
1056 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1057 @unnumberedsec Thank You
1058
1059 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
1060 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
1061 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.@:
1062 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
1063 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
1064 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
1065
1066 @flushright
1067 Robert J. Chassell
1068 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
1069 @end flushright
1070
1071 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
1072
1073 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
1074
1075 @tex
1076 \par\vfill\supereject
1077 \headings off
1078 \ifodd\pageno
1079 \par\vfill\supereject
1080 \else
1081 \par\vfill\supereject
1082 \page\hbox{}\page
1083 \par\vfill\supereject
1084 \fi
1085 @end tex
1086
1087 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
1088 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
1089 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
1090 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
1091 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
1092 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
1093 @c Note that eg the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
1094 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
1095 @iftex
1096 @headings off
1097 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
1098 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
1099 @global@pageno = 1
1100 @end iftex
1101
1102 @node List Processing, Practicing Evaluation, Preface, Top
1103 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1104 @chapter List Processing
1105
1106 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1107 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1108 the name stands for `Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses'. But the
1109 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1110 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1111 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1112 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1113 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1114 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1115 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1116 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1117
1118 @menu
1119 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1120 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1121 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1122 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1123 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1124 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1125 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1126 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1127 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1128 * Summary:: The major points.
1129 * Error Message Exercises::
1130 @end menu
1131
1132 @node Lisp Lists, Run a Program, List Processing, List Processing
1133 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1134 @section Lisp Lists
1135 @cindex Lisp Lists
1136
1137 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1138 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1139 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1140 to be familiar with:
1141
1142 @smallexample
1143 @group
1144 '(rose
1145 violet
1146 daisy
1147 buttercup)
1148 @end group
1149 @end smallexample
1150
1151 @noindent
1152 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1153 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1154 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1155 @cindex Flowers in a field
1156
1157 @menu
1158 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1159 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1160 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1161 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1162 @end menu
1163
1164 @node Numbers Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists, Lisp Lists
1165 @ifnottex
1166 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1167 @end ifnottex
1168
1169 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1170 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1171 separated by whitespace.
1172
1173 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1174 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1175 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1176 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1177 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1178 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1179 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1180
1181 @need 1200
1182 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1183
1184 @smallexample
1185 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1186 @end smallexample
1187
1188 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1189 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1190 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1191 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1192
1193 @node Lisp Atoms, Whitespace in Lists, Numbers Lists, Lisp Lists
1194 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1195 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1196 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1197
1198 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1199 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1200 `indivisible'. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1201 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1202 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1203 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1204 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1205 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1206
1207 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1208 right next to a parenthesis.
1209
1210 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1211 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1212 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1213 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1214 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1215 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1216 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1217
1218 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1219 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1220 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1221 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1222 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1223 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1224 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1225 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1226 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1227 as a synonym for expression.)
1228
1229 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1230 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1231 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1232 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1233 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1234 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1235 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1236 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1237 unsplittable.
1238
1239 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1240 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1241 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1242 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1243
1244 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1245 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1246 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1247 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1248 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1249 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1250 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1251 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1252 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1253 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1254 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1255
1256 @need 1250
1257 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1258 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1259 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1260
1261 @smallexample
1262 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1263 @end smallexample
1264
1265 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1266 @noindent
1267 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1268 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1269 @dfn{string} (for `string of characters') and is the sort of thing that
1270 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1271 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1272 used differently.
1273
1274 @node Whitespace in Lists, Typing Lists, Lisp Atoms, Lisp Lists
1275 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1276 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1277 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1278
1279 @need 1200
1280 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1281 of the Lisp language,
1282
1283 @smallexample
1284 @group
1285 '(this list
1286 looks like this)
1287 @end group
1288 @end smallexample
1289
1290 @need 800
1291 @noindent
1292 is exactly the same as this:
1293
1294 @smallexample
1295 '(this list looks like this)
1296 @end smallexample
1297
1298 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1299 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1300 @samp{this} in that order.
1301
1302 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1303 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1304 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1305 order to tell them apart.)
1306
1307 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1308 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1309 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1310 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1311 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1312 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1313 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1314
1315 @node Typing Lists, , Whitespace in Lists, Lisp Lists
1316 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1317 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1318 @cindex Help typing lists
1319 @cindex Formatting help
1320
1321 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1322 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1323 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1324 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1325 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1326 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1327 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1328 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1329 the enclosing list.
1330
1331 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1332 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1333 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1334 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1335 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1336 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1337
1338 @node Run a Program, Making Errors, Lisp Lists, List Processing
1339 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1340 @section Run a Program
1341 @cindex Run a program
1342 @cindex Program, running one
1343
1344 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1345 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1346 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1347 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1348 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1349 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1350 three things that you really want!)
1351
1352 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1353 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1354 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1355 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1356 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1357 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1358 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1359 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1360 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1361 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1362
1363 @need 1250
1364 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1365 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1366 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1367
1368 @smallexample
1369 (+ 2 2)
1370 @end smallexample
1371
1372 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1373 @noindent
1374 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1375 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1376 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1377 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1378 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1379
1380 @smallexample
1381 '(this is a quoted list)
1382 @end smallexample
1383
1384 @noindent
1385 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1386
1387 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1388 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1389 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1390 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1391 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1392 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1393 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1394
1395 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1396 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1397 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1398 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1399 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1400
1401 @node Making Errors, Names & Definitions, Run a Program, List Processing
1402 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1403 @section Generate an Error Message
1404 @cindex Generate an error message
1405 @cindex Error message generation
1406
1407 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1408 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1409 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1410 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1411 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1412 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1413 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1414 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1415
1416 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1417 will `enter the debugger'. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1418
1419 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1420 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1421 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1422 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1423 C-e}:
1424
1425 @smallexample
1426 (this is an unquoted list)
1427 @end smallexample
1428
1429 @ignore
1430 @noindent
1431 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1432 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1433 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1434 earlier, version 20 result.
1435
1436 @need 1250
1437 @noindent
1438 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1439 you will see the following in it:
1440 @end ignore
1441
1442 A @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and you should see the
1443 following in it:
1444
1445 @smallexample
1446 @group
1447 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1448 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1449 (this is an unquoted list)
1450 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1451 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1452 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1453 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1454 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1455 @end group
1456 @end smallexample
1457
1458 @need 1200
1459 @noindent
1460 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1461 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1462 debugger window go away, type:
1463
1464 @smallexample
1465 q
1466 @end smallexample
1467
1468 @noindent
1469 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1470 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1471 it.
1472
1473 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1474 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1475
1476 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1477 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1478 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1479 an abbreviation for `evaluate' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1480 `symbolic expression'. The command means `evaluate last symbolic
1481 expression', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1482
1483 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1484 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1485 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1486 backwards.
1487
1488 @need 800
1489 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1490
1491 @smallexample
1492 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1493 @end smallexample
1494
1495 @noindent
1496 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1497 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1498 @samp{void-function this}.
1499
1500 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1501
1502 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1503 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1504 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1505 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1506 computer to do something.
1507
1508 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1509 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1510 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1511
1512 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1513 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1514 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1515 contain the instructions is `void'.
1516
1517 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1518 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1519 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1520 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1521
1522 It is possible to prevent Emacs entering the debugger in cases like
1523 this. We do not explain how to do that here, but we will mention what
1524 the result looks like, because you may encounter a similar situation
1525 if there is a bug in some Emacs code that you are using. In such
1526 cases, you will see only one line of error message; it will appear in
1527 the echo area and look like this:
1528
1529 @smallexample
1530 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1531 @end smallexample
1532
1533 @noindent
1534 @ignore
1535 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1536 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.)
1537 @end ignore
1538 The message goes away as soon as you type a key, even just to
1539 move the cursor.
1540
1541 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1542 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1543 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1544 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1545 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1546 moment.)
1547
1548 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1549 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1550 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1551
1552 @node Names & Definitions, Lisp Interpreter, Making Errors, List Processing
1553 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1554 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1555 @cindex Symbol names
1556
1557 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1558 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1559 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1560 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1561 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1562 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1563 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1564 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1565 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1566 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1567
1568 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1569 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1570 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1571 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1572 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1573
1574 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1575 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1576 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1577 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1578 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1579 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1580
1581 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1582 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1583 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1584 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1585 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1586
1587 @node Lisp Interpreter, Evaluation, Names & Definitions, List Processing
1588 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1589 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1590 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1591 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1592
1593 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1594 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1595 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1596 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1597 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1598 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1599 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1600 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1601
1602 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1603 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1604 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1605 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1606 yourself or the computer.
1607
1608 @menu
1609 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1610 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1611 @end menu
1612
1613 @node Complications, Byte Compiling, Lisp Interpreter, Lisp Interpreter
1614 @ifnottex
1615 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1616 @end ifnottex
1617
1618 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1619 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1620 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1621 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1622 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1623
1624 @cindex Special form
1625 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and do
1626 not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called @dfn{special
1627 forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a function, and
1628 there are not many of them. In the next few chapters, you will be
1629 introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1630
1631 The third and final complication is this: if the function that the
1632 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1633 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1634 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1635 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1636 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1637 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1638 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1639 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1640 used by the enclosing expression.
1641
1642 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1643 the next.
1644
1645 @node Byte Compiling, , Complications, Lisp Interpreter
1646 @subsection Byte Compiling
1647 @cindex Byte compiling
1648
1649 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1650 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1651 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1652 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1653 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1654
1655 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1656 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1657 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1658 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1659 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1660 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1661
1662 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1663 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1664 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1665 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1666 compilation.
1667
1668 @node Evaluation, Variables, Lisp Interpreter, List Processing
1669 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1670 @section Evaluation
1671 @cindex Evaluation
1672
1673 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1674 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1675 `evaluates the expression'. I've used this term several times before.
1676 The word comes from its use in everyday language, `to ascertain the
1677 value or amount of; to appraise', according to @cite{Webster's New
1678 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1679
1680 @menu
1681 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1682 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1683 @end menu
1684
1685 @node How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluating Inner Lists, Evaluation, Evaluation
1686 @ifnottex
1687 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1688 @end ifnottex
1689
1690 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1691 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1692 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1693 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1694 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1695 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1696 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1697 what is called an `infinite loop'. These actions are less common; and
1698 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1699
1700 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1701 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1702 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1703 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1704 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1705 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1706 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1707
1708 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1709 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1710 or else produce an error.
1711
1712 @node Evaluating Inner Lists, , How the Interpreter Acts, Evaluation
1713 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1714 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1715 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1716 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1717
1718 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1719 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1720 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1721 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1722 expressions.
1723
1724 @need 1250
1725 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1726 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1727
1728 @smallexample
1729 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1730 @end smallexample
1731
1732 @noindent
1733 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1734
1735 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1736 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1737 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1738 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1739 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1740
1741 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1742 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1743 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for `symbolic expression', and
1744 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for `evaluate'. The command means
1745 `evaluate last symbolic expression'.
1746
1747 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1748 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1749 expression, or inside the expression.
1750
1751 @need 800
1752 Here is another copy of the expression:
1753
1754 @smallexample
1755 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1756 @end smallexample
1757
1758 @noindent
1759 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1760 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1761 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1762 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1763 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1764 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1765 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1766
1767 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1768 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1769 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1770 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1771 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1772 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1773 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1774 see in the next section.
1775
1776 @node Variables, Arguments, Evaluation, List Processing
1777 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1778 @section Variables
1779 @cindex Variables
1780
1781 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1782 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1783 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1784 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1785 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1786 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1787 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1788 @dfn{variable}.
1789
1790 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1791 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1792 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1793 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1794 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1795 ``great programming center''.
1796
1797 @ignore
1798 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1799 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1800 string; these are discussed later.)
1801 @end ignore
1802
1803 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1804 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1805 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1806 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1807 function definition, and vice-verse.
1808
1809 @menu
1810 * fill-column Example::
1811 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1812 without a function.
1813 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1814 @end menu
1815
1816 @node fill-column Example, Void Function, Variables, Variables
1817 @ifnottex
1818 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1819 @end ifnottex
1820
1821 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1822 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1823 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1824 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1825 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1826 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1827 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1828 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1829 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1830
1831 @smallexample
1832 fill-column
1833 @end smallexample
1834
1835 @noindent
1836 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1837 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1838 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1839 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1840 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1841 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1842 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1843 the value is known.
1844
1845 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1846 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1847 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1848 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1849
1850 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1851 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1852 this.
1853
1854 @node Void Function, Void Variable, fill-column Example, Variables
1855 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1856 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1857 @cindex Symbol without function error
1858 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1859
1860 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1861 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1862 not intend to use it as a function name.
1863
1864 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1865 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1866 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1867 Try evaluating this:
1868
1869 @smallexample
1870 (fill-column)
1871 @end smallexample
1872
1873 @need 1250
1874 @noindent
1875 You will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
1876
1877 @smallexample
1878 @group
1879 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1880 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1881 (fill-column)
1882 eval((fill-column))
1883 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1884 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1885 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1886 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1887 @end group
1888 @end smallexample
1889
1890 @noindent
1891 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1892 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1893
1894 @ignore
1895 @need 800
1896 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1897
1898 @smallexample
1899 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1900 @end smallexample
1901
1902 @noindent
1903 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1904 another key.)
1905 @end ignore
1906
1907 @node Void Variable, , Void Function, Variables
1908 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1909 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1910 @cindex Symbol without value error
1911 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1912
1913 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1914 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1915 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1916 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1917 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1918
1919 @smallexample
1920 (+ 2 2)
1921 @end smallexample
1922
1923 @need 1500
1924 @noindent
1925 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1926 says:
1927
1928 @smallexample
1929 @group
1930 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1931 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1932 eval(+)
1933 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1934 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1935 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1936 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1937 @end group
1938 @end smallexample
1939
1940 @noindent
1941 (Again, you can quit the debugger by
1942 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1943
1944 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1945 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1946 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1947 in the other error message, the function (the word `this') did not
1948 have a definition.
1949
1950 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1951 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1952 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1953 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1954 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1955 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was
1956 @code{+} by itself.
1957
1958 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1959 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1960 variable was void.
1961
1962 @ignore
1963 @need 800
1964 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1965
1966 @example
1967 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1968 @end example
1969
1970 @noindent
1971 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1972 @end ignore
1973
1974 @node Arguments, set & setq, Variables, List Processing
1975 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
1976 @section Arguments
1977 @cindex Arguments
1978 @cindex Passing information to functions
1979
1980 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1981 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1982 as follows:
1983
1984 @smallexample
1985 (+ 2 2)
1986 @end smallexample
1987
1988 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1989 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1990 the @code{+}.
1991
1992 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1993 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1994 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1995 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1996
1997 The word `argument' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1998 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1999 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
2000 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
2001 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
2002 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
2003 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
2004 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word `argument'
2005 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
2006 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
2007 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
2008 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, `the evidence offered as
2009 proof', which is to say, `the information offered', which led to its
2010 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
2011 `to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
2012 assertions', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
2013 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
2014 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
2015 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
2016
2017 @menu
2018 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
2019 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
2020 of a variable or list.
2021 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
2022 variable number of arguments.
2023 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
2024 to a function.
2025 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
2026 @end menu
2027
2028 @node Data types, Args as Variable or List, Arguments, Arguments
2029 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2030 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
2031 @cindex Data types
2032 @cindex Types of data
2033 @cindex Arguments' data types
2034
2035 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
2036 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
2037 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
2038 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
2039
2040 @need 1250
2041 @findex concat
2042 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
2043 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
2044 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
2045 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
2046 following:
2047
2048 @smallexample
2049 (concat "abc" "def")
2050 @end smallexample
2051
2052 @noindent
2053 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
2054
2055 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
2056 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
2057 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
2058 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments are
2059 numbers that indicate the beginning and end of the substring. The
2060 numbers are a count of the number of characters (including spaces and
2061 punctuation) from the beginning of the string.
2062
2063 @need 800
2064 For example, if you evaluate the following:
2065
2066 @smallexample
2067 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
2068 @end smallexample
2069
2070 @noindent
2071 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
2072 string and the two numbers.
2073
2074 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
2075 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
2076 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
2077 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
2078 a kind of `atom smasher' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
2079 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
2080 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
2081 atom such as a number or symbol.
2082
2083 @node Args as Variable or List, Variable Number of Arguments, Data types, Arguments
2084 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2085 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
2086
2087 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
2088 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
2089 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
2090
2091 @need 1250
2092 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
2093 C-e}:
2094
2095 @smallexample
2096 (+ 2 fill-column)
2097 @end smallexample
2098
2099 @noindent
2100 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
2101 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
2102 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2103
2104 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2105 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2106 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2107 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2108 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2109 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2110
2111 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2112 @smallexample
2113 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2114 @end smallexample
2115
2116 @noindent
2117 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2118 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2119 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2120 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2121 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2122 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2123 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2124
2125 @node Variable Number of Arguments, Wrong Type of Argument, Args as Variable or List, Arguments
2126 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2127 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2128 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2129 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2130
2131 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2132 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2133 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2134 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2135 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
2136
2137 @need 1250
2138 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2139
2140 @smallexample
2141 @group
2142 (+) @result{} 0
2143
2144 (*) @result{} 1
2145 @end group
2146 @end smallexample
2147
2148 @need 1250
2149 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2150
2151 @smallexample
2152 @group
2153 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2154
2155 (* 3) @result{} 3
2156 @end group
2157 @end smallexample
2158
2159 @need 1250
2160 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2161
2162 @smallexample
2163 @group
2164 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2165
2166 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2167 @end group
2168 @end smallexample
2169
2170 @node Wrong Type of Argument, message, Variable Number of Arguments, Arguments
2171 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2172 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2173 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2174 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2175
2176 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2177 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2178 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2179 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2180 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2181 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2182
2183 @smallexample
2184 (+ 2 'hello)
2185 @end smallexample
2186
2187 @noindent
2188 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2189 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2190 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2191 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2192 could not carry out its addition.
2193
2194 @need 1250
2195 You will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2196
2197 @noindent
2198 @smallexample
2199 @group
2200 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2201 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2202 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2203 +(2 hello)
2204 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2205 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2206 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2207 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2208 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2209 @end group
2210 @end smallexample
2211
2212 @need 1250
2213 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2214 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2215 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2216
2217 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2218 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2219 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2220 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2221
2222 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2223 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2224 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2225 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2226 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2227 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2228 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2229 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2230 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2231 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2232 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2233 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2234
2235 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2236 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2237 stands for `predicate'. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2238 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2239 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2240 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2241 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2242 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2243 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2244 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2245
2246 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2247 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2248 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2249 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2250 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2251
2252 @ignore
2253 @need 1250
2254 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2255 message that says:
2256
2257 @smallexample
2258 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2259 @end smallexample
2260
2261 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2262 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2263 @end ignore
2264
2265 @node message, , Wrong Type of Argument, Arguments
2266 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2267 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2268 @findex message
2269
2270 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2271 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2272 that we will describe it here.
2273
2274 @need 1250
2275 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2276 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2277
2278 @smallexample
2279 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2280 @end smallexample
2281
2282 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2283 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2284 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2285 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2286 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2287 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2288 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2289 detail}, for an example of this.)
2290
2291 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2292 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2293 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2294 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2295 @samp{%s} is.
2296
2297 @need 1250
2298 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2299 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2300
2301 @smallexample
2302 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2303 @end smallexample
2304
2305 @noindent
2306 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2307 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2308 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2309 of @code{%s}.
2310
2311 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2312 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2313 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2314
2315 @smallexample
2316 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2317 @end smallexample
2318
2319 @noindent
2320 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2321 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2322 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2323 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2324 anything that is not a number.}.
2325
2326 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2327 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2328 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2329 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2330
2331 @need 1250
2332 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2333
2334 @smallexample
2335 @group
2336 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2337 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2338 @end group
2339 @end smallexample
2340
2341 @noindent
2342 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2343 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2344
2345 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2346 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2347 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2348 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2349 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2350
2351 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2352 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2353 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2354 for @samp{%s}:
2355
2356 @smallexample
2357 @group
2358 (message "He saw %d %s"
2359 (- fill-column 32)
2360 (concat "red "
2361 (substring
2362 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2363 " leaping."))
2364 @end group
2365 @end smallexample
2366
2367 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2368 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2369 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2370 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2371 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2372 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2373
2374 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2375 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2376 area.
2377
2378 @node set & setq, Summary, Arguments, List Processing
2379 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2380 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2381 @cindex Variable, setting value
2382 @cindex Setting value of variable
2383
2384 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2385 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2386 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2387 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2388 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2389
2390 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2391 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2392
2393 @menu
2394 * Using set:: Setting values.
2395 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2396 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2397 @end menu
2398
2399 @node Using set, Using setq, set & setq, set & setq
2400 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2401 @subsection Using @code{set}
2402 @findex set
2403
2404 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2405 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2406 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2407
2408 @smallexample
2409 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2410 @end smallexample
2411
2412 @noindent
2413 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2414 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2415 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2416 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2417 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2418 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2419 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2420 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2421 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2422
2423 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2424 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2425 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2426
2427 @smallexample
2428 flowers
2429 @end smallexample
2430
2431 @noindent
2432 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2433 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2434
2435 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2436 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2437 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2438
2439 @smallexample
2440 'flowers
2441 @end smallexample
2442
2443 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2444 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2445 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2446 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2447 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2448 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2449 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2450 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2451 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2452 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2453 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2454 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2455
2456 @node Using setq, Counting, Using set, set & setq
2457 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2458 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2459 @findex setq
2460
2461 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2462 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2463 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2464 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2465 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2466 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2467 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2468
2469 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2470 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2471 is used:
2472
2473 @smallexample
2474 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2475 @end smallexample
2476
2477 @noindent
2478 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2479 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2480 means @code{quote}.)
2481
2482 @need 1250
2483 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2484
2485 @smallexample
2486 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2487 @end smallexample
2488
2489 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2490 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2491 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2492 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2493 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2494 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2495
2496 @smallexample
2497 @group
2498 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2499 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2500 @end group
2501 @end smallexample
2502
2503 @noindent
2504 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2505 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2506 formatted lists.)
2507
2508 Although I have been using the term `assign', there is another way of
2509 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2510 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2511 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2512 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has `pointer' as
2513 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2514 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2515 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2516
2517 @node Counting, , Using setq, set & setq
2518 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2519 @subsection Counting
2520 @cindex Counting
2521
2522 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2523 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2524 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2525 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2526 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2527 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2528 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2529 evaluated.
2530
2531 @smallexample
2532 @group
2533 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2534
2535 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2536
2537 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2538 @end group
2539 @end smallexample
2540
2541 @noindent
2542 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2543 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2544
2545 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2546 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2547 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2548 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2549 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2550 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2551 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2552 the counter will be incremented.
2553
2554 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2555 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2556 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2557 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2558 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2559 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2560 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2561 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2562 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2563
2564 @node Summary, Error Message Exercises, set & setq, List Processing
2565 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2566 @section Summary
2567
2568 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2569 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2570 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2571
2572 @need 1000
2573 In summary,
2574
2575 @itemize @bullet
2576
2577 @item
2578 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2579
2580 @item
2581 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2582 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2583
2584 @item
2585 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2586 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2587 quotation marks, or numbers.
2588
2589 @item
2590 A number evaluates to itself.
2591
2592 @item
2593 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2594
2595 @item
2596 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2597
2598 @item
2599 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2600 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2601 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2602
2603 @item
2604 A single quotation mark,
2605 @ifinfo
2606 '
2607 @end ifinfo
2608 @ifnotinfo
2609 @code{'}
2610 @end ifnotinfo
2611 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2612 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2613 would if the quote were not there.
2614
2615 @item
2616 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2617 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2618 of which the function is the first element.
2619
2620 @item
2621 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2622 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2623 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2624 create a side effect.
2625 @end itemize
2626
2627 @node Error Message Exercises, , Summary, List Processing
2628 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2629 @section Exercises
2630
2631 A few simple exercises:
2632
2633 @itemize @bullet
2634 @item
2635 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2636 not within parentheses.
2637
2638 @item
2639 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2640 between parentheses.
2641
2642 @item
2643 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2644
2645 @item
2646 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2647 evaluated.
2648 @end itemize
2649
2650 @node Practicing Evaluation, Writing Defuns, List Processing, Top
2651 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2652 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2653 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2654 @cindex Evaluation practice
2655
2656 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2657 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2658 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2659 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2660 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2661 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2662 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2663 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2664
2665 @menu
2666 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2667 causes evaluation.
2668 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2669 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2670 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2671 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2672 the buffer.
2673 * Evaluation Exercise::
2674 @end menu
2675
2676 @node How to Evaluate, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation, Practicing Evaluation
2677 @ifnottex
2678 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2679 @end ifnottex
2680
2681 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2682 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2683 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2684 how Emacs works.}
2685
2686 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2687 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2688 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2689 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2690 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2691 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2692 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2693 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2694 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2695 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2696
2697 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2698 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2699 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2700 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2701 will be described as we come to them.
2702
2703 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2704 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2705 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2706 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2707
2708 @node Buffer Names, Getting Buffers, How to Evaluate, Practicing Evaluation
2709 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2710 @section Buffer Names
2711 @findex buffer-name
2712 @findex buffer-file-name
2713
2714 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2715 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2716 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2717 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2718 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2719 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2720 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2721 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2722
2723 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2724 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2725 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2726 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2727 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2728 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2729 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2730 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2731 and is thus saved permanently.
2732
2733 @need 1250
2734 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2735 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2736 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2737
2738 @example
2739 @group
2740 (buffer-name)
2741
2742 (buffer-file-name)
2743 @end group
2744 @end example
2745
2746 @noindent
2747 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2748 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2749 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2750
2751 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2752 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2753 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2754 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2755 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2756
2757 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2758 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2759 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2760 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2761 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2762 from the Latin word for `nothing'; in this case, it means that the
2763 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2764 used to mean `false' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2765
2766 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2767 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2768 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2769
2770 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2771 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2772 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2773 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2774
2775 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2776 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice-verse.
2777 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2778 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2779 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2780 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2781 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2782
2783 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2784 The word `buffer', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2785 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2786 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2787 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2788 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2789 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2790 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2791 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2792 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2793 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2794 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2795 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2796 and cultural center in its own right.
2797
2798 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2799 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2800 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2801
2802 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2803 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2804 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2805 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2806 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2807 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2808
2809 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2810 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2811 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2812 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2813 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2814 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2815 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2816 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2817
2818 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2819 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2820 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2821 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2822 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2823
2824 @smallexample
2825 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2826 @end smallexample
2827
2828 @noindent
2829 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2830 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2831 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2832 this book), this feature is very useful.
2833
2834 @node Getting Buffers, Switching Buffers, Buffer Names, Practicing Evaluation
2835 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2836 @section Getting Buffers
2837 @findex current-buffer
2838 @findex other-buffer
2839 @cindex Getting a buffer
2840
2841 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2842 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2843 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2844 you get is the buffer itself.
2845
2846 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2847 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2848 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2849 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2850 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2851 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2852 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2853 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2854 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2855 @code{current-buffer}.
2856
2857 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2858 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2859 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2860 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2861 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2862 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2863 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2864
2865 @need 800
2866 Here is an expression containing the function:
2867
2868 @smallexample
2869 (current-buffer)
2870 @end smallexample
2871
2872 @noindent
2873 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2874 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2875 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2876 just its name.
2877
2878 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2879 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2880 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2881
2882 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2883 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2884 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2885 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2886 will return that buffer.
2887
2888 @need 800
2889 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2890
2891 @smallexample
2892 (other-buffer)
2893 @end smallexample
2894
2895 @noindent
2896 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2897 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2898 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2899 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2900 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2901 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2902
2903 @node Switching Buffers, Buffer Size & Locations, Getting Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2904 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2905 @section Switching Buffers
2906 @findex switch-to-buffer
2907 @findex set-buffer
2908 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2909
2910 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2911 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2912 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2913 different buffer.
2914
2915 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2916 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2917 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2918 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2919 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2920 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2921 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2922 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2923 @kbd{RET}.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2924 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2925 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2926 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2927 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2928 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2929 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2930
2931 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2932 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2933 does:
2934
2935 @smallexample
2936 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2937 @end smallexample
2938
2939 @noindent
2940 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2941 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2942 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2943 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2944 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2945 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2946 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2947 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2948 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2949 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2950 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2951 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2952 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2953 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2954 following more complex expression:
2955
2956 @smallexample
2957 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2958 @end smallexample
2959
2960 @c noindent
2961 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2962 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2963 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer.
2964 In regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to an invisible
2965 window since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o} (@code{other-window})
2966 to go to another visible buffer.}
2967
2968 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2969 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2970 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2971 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2972 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2973 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2974 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2975 not need to be visible on the screen.
2976
2977 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2978 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2979 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2980 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2981 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2982 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2983 there until the command finishes running).
2984
2985 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2986 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2987 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2988 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2989 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you `call'
2990 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2991 or her.
2992
2993 @node Buffer Size & Locations, Evaluation Exercise, Switching Buffers, Practicing Evaluation
2994 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
2995 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2996 @cindex Size of buffer
2997 @cindex Buffer size
2998 @cindex Point location
2999 @cindex Location of point
3000
3001 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
3002 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
3003 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
3004 the location of point within it.
3005
3006 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
3007 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
3008 characters in the buffer.
3009
3010 @smallexample
3011 (buffer-size)
3012 @end smallexample
3013
3014 @noindent
3015 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
3016 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3017
3018 @cindex @samp{point} defined
3019 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
3020 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
3021 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
3022 beginning of the buffer up to point.
3023
3024 @need 1250
3025 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
3026 the following expression in the usual way:
3027
3028 @smallexample
3029 (point)
3030 @end smallexample
3031
3032 @noindent
3033 As I write this, the value of @code{point} is 65724. The @code{point}
3034 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
3035 book.
3036
3037 @need 1250
3038 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
3039 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
3040
3041 @smallexample
3042 (point)
3043 @end smallexample
3044
3045 @noindent
3046 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
3047 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
3048 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
3049 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
3050
3051 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
3052 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
3053 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
3054 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
3055 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
3056 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
3057 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
3058 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
3059 value of point in the current buffer.
3060
3061 @node Evaluation Exercise, , Buffer Size & Locations, Practicing Evaluation
3062 @section Exercise
3063
3064 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
3065 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
3066
3067 @node Writing Defuns, Buffer Walk Through, Practicing Evaluation, Top
3068 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3069 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
3070 @cindex Definition writing
3071 @cindex Function definition writing
3072 @cindex Writing a function definition
3073
3074 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
3075 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
3076 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
3077 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
3078 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
3079 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
3080 symbol refers to it.)
3081
3082 @menu
3083 * Primitive Functions::
3084 * defun:: The @code{defun} special form.
3085 * Install:: Install a function definition.
3086 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
3087 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
3088 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
3089 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
3090 * if:: What if?
3091 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
3092 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
3093 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point, mark, and buffer.
3094 * Review::
3095 * defun Exercises::
3096 @end menu
3097
3098 @node Primitive Functions, defun, Writing Defuns, Writing Defuns
3099 @ifnottex
3100 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
3101 @end ifnottex
3102 @cindex Primitive functions
3103 @cindex Functions, primitive
3104
3105 @cindex C language primitives
3106 @cindex Primitives written in C
3107 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
3108 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
3109 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
3110 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
3111 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
3112 by you) and some will be primitives written in C. The primitive
3113 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
3114 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
3115 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
3116
3117 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3118 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3119 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3120 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3121 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3122 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3123
3124 @node defun, Install, Primitive Functions, Writing Defuns
3125 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3126 @section The @code{defun} Special Form
3127 @findex defun
3128 @cindex Special form of @code{defun}
3129
3130 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3131 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3132 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3133 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3134 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3135 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}). Because
3136 @code{defun} does not evaluate its arguments in the usual way, it is
3137 called a @dfn{special form}.
3138
3139 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3140 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3141 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3142 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3143 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3144 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3145 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3146 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3147
3148 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3149 @code{defun}:
3150
3151 @enumerate
3152 @item
3153 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3154 attached.
3155
3156 @item
3157 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3158 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3159 @code{()}.
3160
3161 @item
3162 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3163 strongly recommended.)
3164
3165 @item
3166 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3167 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3168 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3169
3170 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3171 @item
3172 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3173 function definition.
3174 @end enumerate
3175
3176 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3177 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3178
3179 @smallexample
3180 @group
3181 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3182 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3183 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3184 @var{body}@dots{})
3185 @end group
3186 @end smallexample
3187
3188 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3189 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3190 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3191
3192 @smallexample
3193 @group
3194 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3195 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3196 (* 7 number))
3197 @end group
3198 @end smallexample
3199
3200 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3201 followed by the name of the function.
3202
3203 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3204 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3205 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3206 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3207 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3208 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3209 function.
3210
3211 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3212 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3213 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word `number' because it
3214 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3215 well have chosen the word `multiplicand' to indicate the role that the
3216 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3217 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3218 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3219 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3220 the function clear.
3221
3222 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3223 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3224 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3225 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3226 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3227 nick-name `Shorty' in your family; when your family members refer to
3228 `Shorty', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3229 example, the name `Shorty' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3230 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3231 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3232 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3233 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3234
3235 @ignore
3236 Note also that we discuss the word `number' in two different ways: as a
3237 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3238 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3239 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3240 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3241 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3242 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3243 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3244 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3245 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3246 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3247 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3248 @end ignore
3249
3250 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3251 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3252 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3253 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3254 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3255 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3256 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3257 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3258 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3259 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3260 write.
3261
3262 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3263 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3264 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3265 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3266 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3267 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3268 function for addition.)
3269
3270 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3271 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3272 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3273 to evaluate this yet!
3274
3275 @smallexample
3276 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3277 @end smallexample
3278
3279 @noindent
3280 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3281 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3282 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3283 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3284 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3285 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3286 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3287 definition begins.
3288
3289 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3290 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3291 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3292 not yet installed (or `loaded') the function definition in Emacs.
3293 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3294 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3295 section.
3296
3297 @node Install, Interactive, defun, Writing Defuns
3298 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3299 @section Install a Function Definition
3300 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3301 @cindex Definition installation
3302 @cindex Function definition installation
3303
3304 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3305 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3306 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3307 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3308 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3309 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3310 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3311 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3312 action installs the function definition.
3313
3314 @smallexample
3315 @group
3316 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3317 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3318 (* 7 number))
3319 @end group
3320 @end smallexample
3321
3322 @noindent
3323 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3324 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3325 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3326 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3327 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3328 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3329
3330 @menu
3331 * Effect of installation::
3332 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3333 @end menu
3334
3335 @node Effect of installation, Change a defun, Install, Install
3336 @ifnottex
3337 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3338 @end ifnottex
3339
3340 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3341 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3342 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3343 echo area.
3344
3345 @smallexample
3346 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3347 @end smallexample
3348
3349 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3350 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3351 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3352 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3353
3354 @smallexample
3355 @group
3356 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3357 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3358
3359 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3360 @end group
3361 @end smallexample
3362
3363 @noindent
3364 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3365
3366 @node Change a defun, , Effect of installation, Install
3367 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3368 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3369 @cindex Changing a function definition
3370 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3371 @cindex Definition, how to change
3372
3373 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3374 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3375 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3376 very simple.
3377
3378 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3379 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3380 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3381 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3382 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3383 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3384 version''.
3385
3386 @smallexample
3387 @group
3388 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3389 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3390 (+ number number number number number number number))
3391 @end group
3392 @end smallexample
3393
3394 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3395 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3396 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3397 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3398 each line with a semicolon.
3399
3400 @xref{Beginning a .emacs File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3401 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3402 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3403
3404 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3405 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3406 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3407
3408 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3409 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3410 install it again.
3411
3412 @node Interactive, Interactive Options, Install, Writing Defuns
3413 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3414 @section Make a Function Interactive
3415 @cindex Interactive functions
3416 @findex interactive
3417
3418 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3419 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3420 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3421 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3422 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3423 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3424
3425 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3426 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3427 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3428 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3429 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3430 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3431
3432 @menu
3433 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3434 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3435 @end menu
3436
3437 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven, multiply-by-seven in detail, Interactive, Interactive
3438 @ifnottex
3439 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3440 @end ifnottex
3441
3442 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3443 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3444 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3445
3446 @need 1250
3447 Here is the code:
3448
3449 @smallexample
3450 @group
3451 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3452 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3453 (interactive "p")
3454 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3455 @end group
3456 @end smallexample
3457
3458 @noindent
3459 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3460 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3461 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3462 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3463 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3464 echo area.
3465
3466 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3467 ways:
3468
3469 @enumerate
3470 @item
3471 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3472 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3473 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3474
3475 @item
3476 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3477 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3478 @end enumerate
3479
3480 @noindent
3481 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3482 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3483 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3484
3485 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3486 to a key.)
3487
3488 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3489 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3490 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3491 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3492
3493 @node multiply-by-seven in detail, , Interactive multiply-by-seven, Interactive
3494 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3495 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3496
3497 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3498 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3499 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3500 looks like this:
3501
3502 @smallexample
3503 @group
3504 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3505 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3506 (interactive "p")
3507 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3508 @end group
3509 @end smallexample
3510
3511 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3512 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3513 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3514
3515 @need 1000
3516 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3517 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3518
3519 @smallexample
3520 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3521 @end smallexample
3522
3523 @need 1250
3524 @noindent
3525 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3526 evaluate the line as if it were:
3527
3528 @smallexample
3529 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3530 @end smallexample
3531
3532 @noindent
3533 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3534 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3535 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3536 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3537 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3538
3539 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3540 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3541 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3542 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3543 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3544 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3545 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3546 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3547 sequence is located.
3548
3549 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3550 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3551 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3552 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3553 is 35}.
3554
3555 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3556 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3557 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3558 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3559 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3560 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3561 quotes.)
3562
3563 @node Interactive Options, Permanent Installation, Interactive, Writing Defuns
3564 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3565 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3566 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3567 @cindex Interactive options
3568
3569 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3570 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3571 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3572 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3573 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3574 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3575 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3576 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3577 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3578
3579 @need 1250
3580 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3581 is
3582
3583 @smallexample
3584 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3585 @end smallexample
3586
3587 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3588 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3589 interpret a `prefix', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3590 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3591 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3592 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3593 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3594 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3595 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3596 character, but no more.
3597
3598 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3599
3600 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3601 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3602 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3603 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3604 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3605 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3606 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3607 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3608 is one) and the character.
3609
3610 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3611 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3612 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3613
3614 @smallexample
3615 @group
3616 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3617 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3618 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3619 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3620 @end group
3621 @end smallexample
3622
3623 @noindent
3624 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3625 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3626 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3627
3628 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3629 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3630 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3631 this.
3632
3633 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3634 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3635 a list.
3636
3637 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3638 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3639 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3640 explanation about this technique.
3641
3642 @node Permanent Installation, let, Interactive Options, Writing Defuns
3643 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3644 @section Install Code Permanently
3645 @cindex Install code permanently
3646 @cindex Permanent code installation
3647 @cindex Code installation
3648
3649 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3650 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3651 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3652 function definition again.
3653
3654 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3655 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3656 doing this:
3657
3658 @itemize @bullet
3659 @item
3660 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3661 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3662 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3663 the function definitions within it are installed.
3664 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3665
3666 @item
3667 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3668 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3669 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3670 functions in the files.
3671 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3672
3673 @item
3674 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3675 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3676 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3677 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3678 distribution.)
3679 @end itemize
3680
3681 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3682 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3683 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3684 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3685 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3686 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3687 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3688 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3689 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3690
3691 @node let, if, Permanent Installation, Writing Defuns
3692 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3693 @section @code{let}
3694 @findex let
3695
3696 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3697 to use in most function definitions.
3698
3699 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3700 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3701 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3702
3703 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3704 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3705 `the house', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3706 are visiting a friend and your host refers to `the house', he is
3707 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3708 different house.
3709
3710 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3711 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3712 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3713 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3714 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3715 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3716
3717 @menu
3718 * Prevent confusion::
3719 * Parts of let Expression::
3720 * Sample let Expression::
3721 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3722 @end menu
3723
3724 @node Prevent confusion, Parts of let Expression, let, let
3725 @ifnottex
3726 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3727 @end ifnottex
3728
3729 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3730 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3731 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3732 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3733 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3734 that whenever your host refers to `the house', he means his house, not
3735 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3736 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
3737
3738 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3739 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3740 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3741 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3742
3743 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3744 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3745 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3746 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3747 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3748 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3749 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3750
3751 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3752 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3753 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3754 `binding the variable to the value'.) After @code{let} has created
3755 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3756 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3757 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (`Execute' is a jargon
3758 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3759 meaning `to give practical effect to' (@cite{Oxford English
3760 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3761 `execute' has evolved as a synonym to `evaluate'.)
3762
3763 @node Parts of let Expression, Sample let Expression, Prevent confusion, let
3764 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3765 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3766 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3767 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3768
3769 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3770 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3771 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3772 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3773 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3774 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3775 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3776
3777 @need 800
3778 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3779
3780 @smallexample
3781 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3782 @end smallexample
3783
3784 @noindent
3785 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3786 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3787 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3788 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3789 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3790
3791 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3792 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3793 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3794 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3795
3796 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3797 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3798 template.
3799
3800 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3801 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3802
3803 @smallexample
3804 @group
3805 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3806 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3807 @dots{})
3808 @var{body}@dots{})
3809 @end group
3810 @end smallexample
3811
3812 @node Sample let Expression, Uninitialized let Variables, Parts of let Expression, let
3813 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3814 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3815 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3816 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3817
3818 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3819 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3820 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3821
3822 @smallexample
3823 @group
3824 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3825 (tiger 'fierce))
3826 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3827 zebra tiger))
3828 @end group
3829 @end smallexample
3830
3831 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3832
3833 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3834 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3835 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3836 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3837 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3838 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3839 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3840 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3841 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3842 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3843 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3844 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3845 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3846 in the echo area.
3847
3848 @need 1500
3849 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3850 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3851 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3852
3853 @smallexample
3854 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3855 @end smallexample
3856
3857 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3858 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3859 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3860 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3861 second @samp{%s}.
3862
3863 @node Uninitialized let Variables, , Sample let Expression, let
3864 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3865 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3866 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3867 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3868
3869 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3870 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3871 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3872
3873 @smallexample
3874 @group
3875 (let ((birch 3)
3876 pine
3877 fir
3878 (oak 'some))
3879 (message
3880 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3881 birch pine fir oak))
3882 @end group
3883 @end smallexample
3884
3885 @noindent
3886 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3887
3888 @need 1250
3889 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3890 appear in your echo area:
3891
3892 @smallexample
3893 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3894 @end smallexample
3895
3896 @noindent
3897 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3898 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3899 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3900
3901 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3902 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3903 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3904 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3905 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3906 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3907 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3908 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3909 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3910 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3911
3912 @node if, else, let, Writing Defuns
3913 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
3914 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3915 @findex if
3916 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3917
3918 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3919 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3920 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3921 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3922 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3923 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3924
3925 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3926 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3927 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3928 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3929
3930 @menu
3931 * if in more detail::
3932 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3933 @end menu
3934
3935 @node if in more detail, type-of-animal in detail, if, if
3936 @ifnottex
3937 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3938 @end ifnottex
3939
3940 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3941 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3942 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word `then';
3943 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3944 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3945 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3946 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3947
3948 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3949 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3950 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3951 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3952 expression easier to read.
3953
3954 @smallexample
3955 @group
3956 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3957 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3958 @end group
3959 @end smallexample
3960
3961 @noindent
3962 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3963 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3964
3965 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3966 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3967 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3968
3969 @smallexample
3970 @group
3971 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3972 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3973 @end group
3974 @end smallexample
3975
3976 @noindent
3977 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3978 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3979 @findex > (greater than)
3980
3981 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3982 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3983 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3984 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3985 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3986
3987 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3988 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3989 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3990 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3991 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3992
3993 @smallexample
3994 @group
3995 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3996 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3997 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3998 then warn of a tiger."
3999 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4000 (message "It's a tiger!")))
4001 @end group
4002 @end smallexample
4003
4004 @need 1500
4005 @noindent
4006 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
4007 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
4008 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
4009
4010 @smallexample
4011 @group
4012 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4013
4014 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4015
4016 @end group
4017 @end smallexample
4018
4019 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4020 @noindent
4021 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4022 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
4023 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
4024 printed in the echo area.
4025
4026 @node type-of-animal in detail, , if in more detail, if
4027 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4028 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
4029
4030 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
4031
4032 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
4033 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
4034 a second for an @code{if} expression.
4035
4036 @need 1250
4037 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
4038
4039 @smallexample
4040 @group
4041 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4042 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4043 @var{body}@dots{})
4044 @end group
4045 @end smallexample
4046
4047 @need 800
4048 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
4049
4050 @smallexample
4051 @group
4052 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
4053 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4054 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4055 then warn of a tiger."
4056 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
4057 @end group
4058 @end smallexample
4059
4060 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
4061 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
4062 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
4063 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
4064 every function definition. The body of the function definition
4065 consists of the @code{if} expression.
4066
4067 @need 800
4068 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
4069
4070 @smallexample
4071 @group
4072 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4073 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
4074 @end group
4075 @end smallexample
4076
4077 @need 1250
4078 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
4079 looks like this:
4080
4081 @smallexample
4082 @group
4083 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4084 (message "It's a tiger!")))
4085 @end group
4086 @end smallexample
4087
4088 @need 800
4089 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
4090
4091 @smallexample
4092 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4093 @end smallexample
4094
4095 @noindent
4096 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
4097 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
4098 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
4099 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
4100 this function.
4101
4102 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
4103 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
4104 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
4105 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
4106 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
4107 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
4108
4109 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
4110 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
4111 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
4112 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
4113
4114 @node else, Truth & Falsehood, if, Writing Defuns
4115 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4116 @section If--then--else Expressions
4117 @cindex Else
4118
4119 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
4120 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
4121 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
4122 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
4123 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
4124 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
4125 the beach, else read a book!''.
4126
4127 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
4128 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
4129 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
4130 indented less than the then-part:
4131
4132 @smallexample
4133 @group
4134 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4135 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4136 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4137 @end group
4138 @end smallexample
4139
4140 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4141 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4142
4143 @smallexample
4144 @group
4145 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4146 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4147 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4148 @end group
4149 @end smallexample
4150
4151 @noindent
4152 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4153 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4154 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4155 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4156
4157 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4158 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4159 expression.
4160
4161 @need 1500
4162 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4163 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4164 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4165 arguments to the function.
4166
4167 @smallexample
4168 @group
4169 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4170 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4171 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4172 then warn of a tiger;
4173 else say it's not fierce."
4174 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4175 (message "It's a tiger!")
4176 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4177 @end group
4178 @end smallexample
4179 @sp 1
4180
4181 @smallexample
4182 @group
4183 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4184
4185 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4186
4187 @end group
4188 @end smallexample
4189
4190 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4191 @noindent
4192 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4193 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4194 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4195 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4196
4197 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4198 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4199 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4200 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4201 and write your program accordingly.)
4202
4203 @node Truth & Falsehood, save-excursion, else, Writing Defuns
4204 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4205 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4206 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4207 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4208 @findex nil
4209
4210 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4211 expression. So far, we have spoken of `true' and `false' as values of
4212 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4213 `false' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4214 at all---is `true'.
4215
4216 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4217 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4218 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4219 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4220 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4221 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4222
4223 @menu
4224 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4225 @end menu
4226
4227 @node nil explained, , Truth & Falsehood, Truth & Falsehood
4228 @ifnottex
4229 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4230 @end ifnottex
4231
4232 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4233
4234 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4235 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4236 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4237 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4238 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4239 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4240
4241 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4242 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4243 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4244 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4245 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4246 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4247 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4248 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4249
4250 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4251
4252 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4253 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4254 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4255 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4256 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4257 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4258
4259 @smallexample
4260 @group
4261 (if 4
4262 'true
4263 'false)
4264 @end group
4265
4266 @group
4267 (if nil
4268 'true
4269 'false)
4270 @end group
4271 @end smallexample
4272
4273 @need 1250
4274 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4275 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4276 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4277 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4278
4279 @smallexample
4280 (> 5 4)
4281 @end smallexample
4282
4283 @need 1250
4284 @noindent
4285 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4286
4287 @smallexample
4288 (> 4 5)
4289 @end smallexample
4290
4291 @node save-excursion, Review, Truth & Falsehood, Writing Defuns
4292 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4293 @section @code{save-excursion}
4294 @findex save-excursion
4295 @cindex Region, what it is
4296 @cindex Preserving point, mark, and buffer
4297 @cindex Point, mark, buffer preservation
4298 @findex point
4299 @findex mark
4300
4301 The @code{save-excursion} function is the fourth and final special form
4302 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4303
4304 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4305 function is very common. It saves the location of point and mark,
4306 executes the body of the function, and then restores point and mark to
4307 their previous positions if their locations were changed. Its primary
4308 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4309 unexpected movement of point or mark.
4310
4311 @menu
4312 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4313 * Template for save-excursion::
4314 @end menu
4315
4316 @node Point and mark, Template for save-excursion, save-excursion, save-excursion
4317 @ifnottex
4318 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4319 @end ifnottex
4320
4321 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4322 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4323 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4324 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4325 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4326 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4327 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4328 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4329 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4330
4331 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4332 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4333 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4334 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4335 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4336 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4337 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4338 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4339 times.
4340
4341 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4342 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4343 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4344 @code{print-region}.
4345
4346 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the locations of point and
4347 mark and restores those positions after the code within the body of the
4348 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4349 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4350 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4351 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4352 evaluated.
4353
4354 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4355 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4356 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4357 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4358 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point and
4359 mark in the location expected by the user. The use of
4360 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4361
4362 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4363 values of point and mark even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4364 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4365 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4366
4367 In addition to recording the values of point and mark,
4368 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4369 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4370 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4371 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4372 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4373
4374 @node Template for save-excursion, , Point and mark, save-excursion
4375 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4376 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4377
4378 @need 800
4379 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4380
4381 @smallexample
4382 @group
4383 (save-excursion
4384 @var{body}@dots{})
4385 @end group
4386 @end smallexample
4387
4388 @noindent
4389 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4390 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4391 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4392 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4393 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4394 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4395 is restoring the positions of point and mark).
4396
4397 @need 1250
4398 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4399 looks like this:
4400
4401 @smallexample
4402 @group
4403 (save-excursion
4404 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4405 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4406 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4407 @dots{}
4408 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4409 @end group
4410 @end smallexample
4411
4412 @noindent
4413 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4414
4415 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4416 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4417
4418 @smallexample
4419 @group
4420 (let @var{varlist}
4421 (save-excursion
4422 @var{body}@dots{}))
4423 @end group
4424 @end smallexample
4425
4426 @node Review, defun Exercises, save-excursion, Writing Defuns
4427 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4428 @section Review
4429
4430 In the last few chapters we have introduced a fair number of functions
4431 and special forms. Here they are described in brief, along with a few
4432 similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4433
4434 @table @code
4435 @item eval-last-sexp
4436 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4437 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4438 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4439 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4440
4441 @item defun
4442 Define function. This special form has up to five parts: the name,
4443 a template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4444 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of the
4445 definition.
4446
4447 @need 1250
4448 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4449 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4450 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4451
4452 @smallexample
4453 @group
4454 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4455 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4456 (interactive)
4457 (beginning-of-line 1)
4458 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4459 @end group
4460 @end smallexample
4461
4462 @ignore
4463 In GNU Emacs 22,
4464
4465 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4466 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4467 (interactive "p")
4468 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4469 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4470
4471 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4472 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4473 (interactive)
4474 (beginning-of-line 1)
4475 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4476 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4477 (backward-prefix-chars))
4478 @end ignore
4479
4480 @item interactive
4481 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4482 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4483 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4484 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4485 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4486 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4487
4488 @need 1000
4489 Common code characters are:
4490
4491 @table @code
4492 @item b
4493 The name of an existing buffer.
4494
4495 @item f
4496 The name of an existing file.
4497
4498 @item p
4499 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this `p' is lower case.)
4500
4501 @item r
4502 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4503 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4504 rather than one.
4505 @end table
4506
4507 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4508 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4509 code characters.
4510
4511 @item let
4512 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4513 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4514 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4515 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4516 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4517 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4518 @code{let}.
4519
4520 @need 1250
4521 For example,
4522
4523 @smallexample
4524 @group
4525 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4526 (bar (buffer-size)))
4527 (message
4528 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4529 foo bar))
4530 @end group
4531 @end smallexample
4532
4533 @item save-excursion
4534 Record the values of point and mark and the current buffer before
4535 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the values of point
4536 and mark and buffer afterward.
4537
4538 @need 1250
4539 For example,
4540
4541 @smallexample
4542 @group
4543 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4544 (- (point)
4545 (save-excursion
4546 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4547 @end group
4548 @end smallexample
4549
4550 @item if
4551 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4552 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4553
4554 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4555 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4556 commonly used.
4557
4558 @need 1250
4559 For example,
4560
4561 @smallexample
4562 @group
4563 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4564 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4565 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4566 @end group
4567 @end smallexample
4568
4569 @need 1250
4570 @item <
4571 @itemx >
4572 @itemx <=
4573 @itemx >=
4574 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4575 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4576 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4577 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4578 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4579 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4580 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4581
4582 @need 800
4583 @item =
4584 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4585 markers, are equal.
4586
4587 @need 1250
4588 @item equal
4589 @itemx eq
4590 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4591 of the word `same' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4592 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4593 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4594 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4595 @findex equal
4596 @findex eq
4597
4598 @need 1250
4599 @item string<
4600 @itemx string-lessp
4601 @itemx string=
4602 @itemx string-equal
4603 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4604 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4605 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4606
4607 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4608 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4609 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4610
4611 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4612 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4613 smaller than any string of characters.
4614
4615 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4616 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4617 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4618
4619 @item message
4620 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4621 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4622 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4623 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4624 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4625 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4626 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4627
4628 @item setq
4629 @itemx set
4630 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4631 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4632 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4633 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4634 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4635 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4636
4637 @item buffer-name
4638 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4639
4640 @itemx buffer-file-name
4641 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4642 visiting.
4643
4644 @item current-buffer
4645 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4646 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4647
4648 @item other-buffer
4649 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4650 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4651 buffer).
4652
4653 @item switch-to-buffer
4654 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4655 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4656
4657 @item set-buffer
4658 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4659 alter what the window is showing.
4660
4661 @item buffer-size
4662 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4663
4664 @item point
4665 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4666 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4667 buffer.
4668
4669 @item point-min
4670 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4671 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4672
4673 @item point-max
4674 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4675 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4676 effect.
4677 @end table
4678
4679 @need 1500
4680 @node defun Exercises, , Review, Writing Defuns
4681 @section Exercises
4682
4683 @itemize @bullet
4684 @item
4685 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4686 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4687
4688 @item
4689 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4690 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4691 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4692 @end itemize
4693
4694 @node Buffer Walk Through, More Complex, Writing Defuns, Top
4695 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4696 @chapter A Few Buffer--Related Functions
4697
4698 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4699 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4700 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4701 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4702 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4703 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4704 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4705
4706 @menu
4707 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4708 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4709 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4710 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4711 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4712 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4713 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4714 * Buffer Exercises::
4715 @end menu
4716
4717 @node Finding More, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through, Buffer Walk Through
4718 @section Finding More Information
4719
4720 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4721 @cindex Find function documentation
4722 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4723 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4724 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4725 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4726 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4727 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4728 then @key{RET}).
4729
4730 @cindex Find source of function
4731 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4732 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4733 function definition.
4734
4735 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4736 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4737 @code{push-button} rather than `return' or `enter'. Emacs will take
4738 you directly to the function definition.
4739
4740 @ignore
4741 Not In version 22
4742
4743 If you move point over the file name and press
4744 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4745 than `return' or `enter', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4746 definition.
4747 @end ignore
4748
4749 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4750 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4751 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4752 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4753 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4754 Texinfo source file of this document.
4755 The @code{find-tag} function depends on `tags tables' that record
4756 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4757 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4758
4759 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4760 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4761 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4762 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4763 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4764 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4765 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4766 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4767 @key{ALT}.)
4768
4769 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4770 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4771 @findex find-tag
4772 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4773 set, you may also need to specify the location of your `tags table',
4774 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4775 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4776 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4777 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4778 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4779 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4780 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4781 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4782
4783 @need 1250
4784 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4785 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4786 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4787 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4788
4789 @smallexample
4790 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4791 @end smallexample
4792
4793 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4794
4795 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4796 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4797 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4798
4799 @cindex Library, as term for `file'
4800 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4801 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4802 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4803 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4804 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4805 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4806 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for on-line help. (Sometimes several
4807 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4808 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4809 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4810 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4811 by topic keywords.''
4812
4813 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, Finding More, Buffer Walk Through
4814 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4815 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4816 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4817
4818 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4819 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4820 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4821 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4822 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4823
4824 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4825 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4826 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4827 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4828 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4829 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4830
4831 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4832 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4833 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4834 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4835 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4836 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4837 of the buffer.
4838
4839 @need 1250
4840 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4841
4842 @smallexample
4843 @group
4844 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4845 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4846 leave mark at previous position."
4847 (interactive)
4848 (push-mark)
4849 (goto-char (point-min)))
4850 @end group
4851 @end smallexample
4852
4853 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4854 the special form @code{defun}:
4855
4856 @enumerate
4857 @item
4858 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4859
4860 @item
4861 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4862
4863 @item
4864 The documentation string.
4865
4866 @item
4867 The interactive expression.
4868
4869 @item
4870 The body.
4871 @end enumerate
4872
4873 @noindent
4874 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4875 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4876 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4877 an optional argument.)
4878
4879 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4880 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4881 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4882 require one.
4883
4884 @need 800
4885 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4886
4887 @smallexample
4888 @group
4889 (push-mark)
4890 (goto-char (point-min))
4891 @end group
4892 @end smallexample
4893
4894 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4895 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4896 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4897 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4898
4899 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4900 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4901 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4902 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4903 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4904
4905 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4906 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4907 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4908 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4909
4910 That is all there is to the function definition!
4911
4912 @findex describe-function
4913 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4914 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4915 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4916 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4917 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4918 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4919 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4920
4921 @smallexample
4922 @group
4923 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4924 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4925 @end group
4926 @end smallexample
4927
4928 @noindent
4929 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4930
4931 @noindent
4932 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4933 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4934 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4935 @key{RET}}.)
4936
4937 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4938 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4939 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4940 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4941
4942 @node mark-whole-buffer, append-to-buffer, simplified-beginning-of-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
4943 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
4944 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4945 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4946
4947 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4948 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4949 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4950
4951 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4952 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4953 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4954 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4955 h}.
4956
4957 @menu
4958 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4959 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4960 @end menu
4961
4962 @node mark-whole-buffer overview, Body of mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer, mark-whole-buffer
4963 @ifnottex
4964 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4965 @end ifnottex
4966
4967 @need 1250
4968 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4969
4970 @smallexample
4971 @group
4972 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4973 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4974 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4975 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4976 that uses or sets the mark."
4977 (interactive)
4978 (push-mark (point))
4979 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4980 (goto-char (point-min)))
4981 @end group
4982 @end smallexample
4983
4984 @need 1250
4985 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4986 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4987 this:
4988
4989 @smallexample
4990 @group
4991 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4992 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4993 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4994 @var{body}@dots{})
4995 @end group
4996 @end smallexample
4997
4998 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4999 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
5000 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
5001 The documentation comes next.
5002
5003 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
5004 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
5005 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
5006 previous section.
5007
5008 @need 1250
5009 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer, , mark-whole-buffer overview, mark-whole-buffer
5010 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5011 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
5012
5013 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
5014 lines of code:
5015
5016 @c GNU Emacs 22
5017 @smallexample
5018 @group
5019 (push-mark (point))
5020 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5021 (goto-char (point-min))
5022 @end group
5023 @end smallexample
5024
5025 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
5026
5027 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
5028 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
5029 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
5030 at the current position of the cursor.
5031
5032 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
5033 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
5034 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
5035 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
5036 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
5037 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
5038 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
5039 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
5040 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
5041 there.
5042
5043 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
5044 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
5045 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
5046 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
5047 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
5048 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
5049 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
5050 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
5051 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
5052 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
5053 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
5054
5055 @need 1250
5056 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
5057 The line reads
5058
5059 @smallexample
5060 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
5061 @end smallexample
5062
5063 @noindent
5064 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
5065 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
5066 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
5067 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
5068 it @emph{should} display a message that says `Mark set' when it pushes
5069 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
5070 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
5071 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
5072 region. It is often turned off.
5073
5074 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
5075 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
5076 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
5077 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
5078 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
5079 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
5080 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
5081 region.
5082
5083 @node append-to-buffer, Buffer Related Review, mark-whole-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5084 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5085 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
5086 @findex append-to-buffer
5087
5088 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
5089 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
5090 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
5091 current buffer to a specified buffer.
5092
5093 @menu
5094 * append-to-buffer overview::
5095 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
5096 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
5097 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
5098 @end menu
5099
5100 @node append-to-buffer overview, append interactive, append-to-buffer, append-to-buffer
5101 @ifnottex
5102 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
5103 @end ifnottex
5104
5105 @findex insert-buffer-substring
5106 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
5107 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
5108 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
5109 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
5110 inserts them into another buffer.
5111
5112 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
5113 concerned with setting up the conditions for
5114 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
5115 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
5116 to, and the region that will be copied.
5117
5118 @need 1250
5119 Here is the complete text of the function:
5120
5121 @smallexample
5122 @group
5123 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5124 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5125 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5126 @end group
5127
5128 @group
5129 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5130 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5131 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5132 (interactive
5133 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
5134 (current-buffer) t))
5135 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5136 @end group
5137 @group
5138 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5139 (save-excursion
5140 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5141 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5142 point)
5143 (set-buffer append-to)
5144 (setq point (point))
5145 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5146 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5147 (dolist (window windows)
5148 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5149 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5150 @end group
5151 @end smallexample
5152
5153 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5154 filled-in templates.
5155
5156 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5157 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5158
5159 @smallexample
5160 @group
5161 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5162 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5163 (interactive @dots{})
5164 @var{body}@dots{})
5165 @end group
5166 @end smallexample
5167
5168 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5169 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5170 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5171 will be copied.
5172
5173 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5174 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5175 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5176 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5177
5178 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5179 name. (The function can handle either.)
5180
5181 @node append interactive, append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer overview, append-to-buffer
5182 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5183 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5184
5185 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5186 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5187 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5188 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5189
5190 @smallexample
5191 @group
5192 (interactive
5193 (list (read-buffer
5194 "Append to buffer: "
5195 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5196 (region-beginning)
5197 (region-end)))
5198 @end group
5199 @end smallexample
5200
5201 @noindent
5202 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5203 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5204
5205 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5206 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5207 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5208 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5209 provide if you don't specify anything.
5210
5211 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5212 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5213 for true.
5214
5215 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5216 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5217 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5218 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5219 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5220
5221 @need 1250
5222 The expression looks like this:
5223
5224 @smallexample
5225 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5226 @end smallexample
5227
5228 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5229 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5230 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5231
5232 @need 1250
5233 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5234 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5235
5236 @smallexample
5237 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5238 @end smallexample
5239
5240 @noindent
5241 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5242 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5243
5244 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5245 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5246 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5247 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5248 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5249
5250 @node append-to-buffer body, append save-excursion, append interactive, append-to-buffer
5251 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5252 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5253
5254 @ignore
5255 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5256
5257 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5258 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5259 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5260
5261 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5262 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5263 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5264 (interactive
5265 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5266 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5267 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5268 (save-excursion
5269 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5270 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5271 point)
5272 (set-buffer append-to)
5273 (setq point (point))
5274 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5275 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5276 (dolist (window windows)
5277 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5278 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5279 @end ignore
5280
5281 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5282
5283 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5284 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5285 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5286 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5287 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5288
5289 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5290 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5291 @code{let} expression in outline:
5292
5293 @smallexample
5294 @group
5295 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5296 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5297 (interactive @dots{})
5298 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5299 @var{body}@dots{})
5300 @end group
5301 @end smallexample
5302
5303 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5304
5305 @enumerate
5306 @item
5307 The symbol @code{let};
5308
5309 @item
5310 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5311 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5312
5313 @item
5314 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5315 @end enumerate
5316
5317 @need 800
5318 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5319
5320 @smallexample
5321 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5322 @end smallexample
5323
5324 @noindent
5325 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5326 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5327 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5328 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5329 which you will copy.
5330
5331 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5332 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5333 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5334 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5335 The line looks like this:
5336
5337 @smallexample
5338 @group
5339 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5340 @dots{} )
5341 @end group
5342 @end smallexample
5343
5344 @noindent
5345 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5346 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5347 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5348 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5349
5350 @node append save-excursion, , append-to-buffer body, append-to-buffer
5351 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5352 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5353
5354 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5355 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5356
5357 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the locations of point and
5358 mark, and restores them to those positions after the expressions in the
5359 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5360 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5361 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5362 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5363
5364 @need 1500
5365 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5366 @cindex Formatting convention
5367 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5368 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5369 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5370 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5371 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5372 this:
5373
5374 @smallexample
5375 @group
5376 (defun @dots{}
5377 @dots{}
5378 @dots{}
5379 (let@dots{}
5380 (save-excursion
5381 @dots{}
5382 @end group
5383 @end smallexample
5384
5385 @need 1500
5386 @noindent
5387 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5388 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5389 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5390 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5391 with the @code{let}:
5392
5393 @smallexample
5394 @group
5395 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5396 (save-excursion
5397 @dots{}
5398 (set-buffer @dots{})
5399 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5400 @dots{}))
5401 @end group
5402 @end smallexample
5403
5404 @need 1200
5405 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5406 of filling in the slots of a template:
5407
5408 @smallexample
5409 @group
5410 (save-excursion
5411 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5412 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5413 @dots{}
5414 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5415 @end group
5416 @end smallexample
5417
5418 @need 1200
5419 @noindent
5420 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5421 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5422 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5423 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5424 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5425
5426 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5427 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5428 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5429
5430 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5431 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5432 function.
5433
5434 @need 1250
5435 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5436
5437 @smallexample
5438 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5439 @end smallexample
5440
5441 @need 1250
5442 @noindent
5443 but now it is
5444
5445 @smallexample
5446 (set-buffer append-to)
5447 @end smallexample
5448
5449 @noindent
5450 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5451 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5452 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5453 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5454
5455 @ignore
5456 in GNU Emacs 22
5457
5458 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5459 (save-excursion
5460 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5461 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5462 point)
5463 (set-buffer append-to)
5464 (setq point (point))
5465 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5466 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5467 (dolist (window windows)
5468 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5469 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5470 @end ignore
5471
5472 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5473 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5474 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5475 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5476 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5477 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5478 @code{current-buffer}.
5479
5480 @need 1250
5481 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5482
5483 @smallexample
5484 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5485 @end smallexample
5486
5487 @noindent
5488 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5489 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5490 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5491 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5492 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5493 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5494 command.
5495
5496 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5497 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5498 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5499
5500 @need 800
5501 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5502
5503 @smallexample
5504 @group
5505 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5506 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5507 @var{change-buffer}
5508 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5509
5510 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5511 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5512 @end group
5513 @end smallexample
5514
5515 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5516 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5517 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5518 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5519 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5520 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5521
5522 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5523 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5524 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5525 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5526 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5527
5528 @node Buffer Related Review, Buffer Exercises, append-to-buffer, Buffer Walk Through
5529 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5530 @section Review
5531
5532 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5533
5534 @table @code
5535 @item describe-function
5536 @itemx describe-variable
5537 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5538 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5539
5540 @item find-tag
5541 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5542 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5543 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5544 @key{META} key).
5545
5546 @item save-excursion
5547 Save the location of point and mark and restore their values after the
5548 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5549 the current buffer and return to it.
5550
5551 @item push-mark
5552 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5553 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5554 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5555
5556 @item goto-char
5557 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5558 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5559 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5560
5561 @item insert-buffer-substring
5562 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5563 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5564
5565 @item mark-whole-buffer
5566 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5567
5568 @item set-buffer
5569 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5570 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5571 to work on a different buffer.
5572
5573 @item get-buffer-create
5574 @itemx get-buffer
5575 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5576 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5577 buffer does not exist.
5578 @end table
5579
5580 @need 1500
5581 @node Buffer Exercises, , Buffer Related Review, Buffer Walk Through
5582 @section Exercises
5583
5584 @itemize @bullet
5585 @item
5586 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5587 then test it to see whether it works.
5588
5589 @item
5590 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5591 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5592
5593 @item
5594 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5595 function.
5596 @end itemize
5597
5598 @node More Complex, Narrowing & Widening, Buffer Walk Through, Top
5599 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5600 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5601
5602 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5603 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5604 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5605 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5606 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5607 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5608 to which the name refers.
5609
5610 @menu
5611 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5612 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5613 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5614 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5615 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5616 * optional Exercise::
5617 @end menu
5618
5619 @node copy-to-buffer, insert-buffer, More Complex, More Complex
5620 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5621 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5622 @findex copy-to-buffer
5623
5624 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5625 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5626 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5627 previous text in the second buffer.
5628
5629 @need 800
5630 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5631
5632 @smallexample
5633 @group
5634 @dots{}
5635 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5636 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5637 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5638 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5639 (erase-buffer)
5640 (save-excursion
5641 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5642 @end group
5643 @end smallexample
5644
5645 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5646 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5647
5648 @need 800
5649 The definition then says
5650
5651 @smallexample
5652 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5653 @end smallexample
5654
5655 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5656 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5657 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5658 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5659 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5660 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5661
5662 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5663 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5664 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5665 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5666 mechanism.)
5667
5668 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5669 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5670
5671 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5672 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5673
5674 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5675 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5676 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5677 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5678 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5679 @code{oldbuf}).
5680
5681 Incidentally, this is what is meant by `replacement'. To replace text,
5682 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5683
5684 @need 1250
5685 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5686
5687 @smallexample
5688 @group
5689 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5690 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5691 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5692 (erase-buffer)
5693 (save-excursion
5694 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5695 @end group
5696 @end smallexample
5697
5698 @node insert-buffer, beginning-of-buffer, copy-to-buffer, More Complex
5699 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5700 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5701 @findex insert-buffer
5702
5703 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5704 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5705 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5706 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5707
5708 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5709 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5710
5711 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5712 a discussion of the new body.)
5713
5714 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5715 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5716 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5717
5718 @menu
5719 * insert-buffer code::
5720 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5721 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5722 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5723 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5724 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5725 * New insert-buffer::
5726 @end menu
5727
5728 @node insert-buffer code, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer, insert-buffer
5729 @ifnottex
5730 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5731 @end ifnottex
5732
5733 @need 800
5734 Here is the earlier code:
5735
5736 @smallexample
5737 @group
5738 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5739 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5740 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5741 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5742 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5743 @end group
5744 @group
5745 (or (bufferp buffer)
5746 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5747 (let (start end newmark)
5748 (save-excursion
5749 (save-excursion
5750 (set-buffer buffer)
5751 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5752 @end group
5753 @group
5754 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5755 (setq newmark (point)))
5756 (push-mark newmark)))
5757 @end group
5758 @end smallexample
5759
5760 @need 1200
5761 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5762 outline of the function:
5763
5764 @smallexample
5765 @group
5766 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5767 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5768 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5769 @var{body}@dots{})
5770 @end group
5771 @end smallexample
5772
5773 @node insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer code, insert-buffer
5774 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5775 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5776 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5777
5778 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5779 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5780 buffer:@: }.
5781
5782 @menu
5783 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5784 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5785 @end menu
5786
5787 @node Read-only buffer, b for interactive, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer interactive
5788 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5789 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5790 @cindex Read-only buffer
5791 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5792 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5793
5794 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5795 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5796 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5797 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5798 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5799 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5800 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5801
5802 @node b for interactive, , Read-only buffer, insert-buffer interactive
5803 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5804 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5805
5806 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5807 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5808 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5809 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5810 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5811 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5812 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5813 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5814 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5815 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5816 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5817
5818 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5819 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5820 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5821 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5822
5823 @node insert-buffer body, if & or, insert-buffer interactive, insert-buffer
5824 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5825 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5826
5827 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5828 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5829 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5830 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5831 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5832 into the current buffer.
5833
5834 @need 1250
5835 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5836 function like this:
5837
5838 @smallexample
5839 @group
5840 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5841 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5842 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5843 (or @dots{}
5844 @dots{}
5845 @end group
5846 @group
5847 (let (@var{varlist})
5848 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5849 @end group
5850 @end smallexample
5851
5852 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5853 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5854 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5855
5856 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5857 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5858
5859 @node if & or, Insert or, insert-buffer body, insert-buffer
5860 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5861 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5862
5863 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5864 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5865 then the buffer itself must be got.
5866
5867 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5868 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5869 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5870 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5871
5872 @need 800
5873 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5874
5875 @smallexample
5876 @group
5877 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5878 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5879 @end group
5880 @end smallexample
5881
5882 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5883 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5884
5885 @need 1200
5886 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5887 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5888
5889 @smallexample
5890 @group
5891 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5892 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5893 @end group
5894 @end smallexample
5895
5896 @noindent
5897 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5898 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5899 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5900
5901 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5902 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5903 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5904 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5905 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5906 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5907 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5908 Argument}.)
5909
5910 @need 1200
5911 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5912 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5913
5914 @smallexample
5915 (not (bufferp buffer))
5916 @end smallexample
5917
5918 @noindent
5919 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5920 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5921 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice-verse:
5922 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5923
5924 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5925 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5926 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5927 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5928 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5929 a buffer.
5930
5931 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5932 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5933 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5934 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5935 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5936 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5937 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5938 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5939
5940 @node Insert or, Insert let, if & or, insert-buffer
5941 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
5942 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5943
5944 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5945 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5946 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5947 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5948 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5949 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5950
5951 @findex or
5952 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5953 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5954 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5955 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5956 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5957
5958 @need 800
5959 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5960
5961 @smallexample
5962 @group
5963 (or (bufferp buffer)
5964 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5965 @end group
5966 @end smallexample
5967
5968 @noindent
5969 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5970 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5971 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5972 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5973 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5974 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5975 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5976
5977 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5978 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5979 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5980 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5981 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5982 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5983 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5984
5985 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5986 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5987 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5988 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5989 buffer.
5990
5991 @need 1250
5992 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5993 written like this:
5994
5995 @smallexample
5996 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5997 @end smallexample
5998
5999 @node Insert let, New insert-buffer, Insert or, insert-buffer
6000 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6001 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
6002
6003 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
6004 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
6005 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
6006 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
6007 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
6008 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
6009 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
6010
6011 @need 1200
6012 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
6013 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
6014 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
6015
6016 @smallexample
6017 @group
6018 (save-excursion
6019 (set-buffer buffer)
6020 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6021 @end group
6022 @end smallexample
6023
6024 @noindent
6025 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
6026 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
6027 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
6028 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
6029 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
6030 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
6031 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
6032 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
6033 fourth.
6034
6035 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
6036 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
6037 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
6038 buffer from which the text will be copied.
6039
6040 @need 1250
6041 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
6042
6043 @smallexample
6044 @group
6045 (save-excursion
6046 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
6047 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
6048 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6049 (setq newmark (point)))
6050 @end group
6051 @end smallexample
6052
6053 @noindent
6054 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
6055 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
6056 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
6057 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
6058 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
6059 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
6060 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
6061
6062 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
6063 and mark are relocated to their original places.
6064
6065 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
6066 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
6067 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
6068 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
6069 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
6070 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
6071 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
6072 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
6073 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
6074 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
6075
6076 @need 1250
6077 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
6078
6079 @smallexample
6080 @group
6081 (let (start end newmark)
6082 (save-excursion
6083 (save-excursion
6084 (set-buffer buffer)
6085 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
6086 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
6087 (setq newmark (point)))
6088 (push-mark newmark))
6089 @end group
6090 @end smallexample
6091
6092 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
6093 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
6094 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
6095 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
6096 find and use again and again.
6097
6098 @node New insert-buffer, , Insert let, insert-buffer
6099 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6100 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
6101 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
6102 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
6103
6104 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
6105
6106 @need 1250
6107 It consists of two expressions,
6108
6109 @smallexample
6110 @group
6111 (push-mark
6112 (save-excursion
6113 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
6114 (point)))
6115
6116 nil
6117 @end group
6118 @end smallexample
6119
6120 @noindent
6121 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
6122 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
6123
6124 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
6125 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
6126 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
6127 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
6128 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
6129 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
6130
6131 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
6132 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
6133 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
6134 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
6135 return any value.
6136
6137 @node beginning-of-buffer, Second Buffer Related Review, insert-buffer, More Complex
6138 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6139 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6140 @findex beginning-of-buffer
6141
6142 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
6143 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
6144 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
6145 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
6146
6147 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
6148 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
6149 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
6150 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
6151 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
6152 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
6153 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
6154 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
6155 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
6156 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
6157 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6158 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6159 moves to the end of the buffer.
6160
6161 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6162 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6163
6164 @menu
6165 * Optional Arguments::
6166 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6167 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6168 @end menu
6169
6170 @node Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer
6171 @subsection Optional Arguments
6172
6173 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6174 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6175 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6176 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6177
6178 @cindex Optional arguments
6179 @cindex Keyword
6180 @findex optional
6181 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6182 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6183 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6184 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6185 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6186 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6187
6188 @need 1200
6189 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6190 therefore looks like this:
6191
6192 @smallexample
6193 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6194 @end smallexample
6195
6196 @need 1250
6197 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6198
6199 @smallexample
6200 @group
6201 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6202 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6203 (interactive "P")
6204 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6205 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6206 (push-mark))
6207 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6208 (goto-char
6209 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6210 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6211 @var{else-go-to}
6212 (point-min))))
6213 @var{do-nicety}
6214 @end group
6215 @end smallexample
6216
6217 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6218 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6219 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6220 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6221 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6222
6223 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6224 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6225 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6226 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6227 Manual}.)
6228
6229 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6230 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6231 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6232 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6233 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6234 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6235 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6236
6237 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6238 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6239 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6240 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6241 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6242 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6243 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6244 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6245 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6246 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6247 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6248 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6249 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6250 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6251 simplified form.
6252
6253 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer complete, Optional Arguments, beginning-of-buffer
6254 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6255
6256 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6257 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6258 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6259 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6260 like this:
6261
6262 @smallexample
6263 @group
6264 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6265 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6266 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6267 (/ size 10))
6268 (/
6269 (+ 10
6270 (*
6271 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6272 @end group
6273 @end smallexample
6274
6275 @menu
6276 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6277 * Large buffer case::
6278 * Small buffer case::
6279 @end menu
6280
6281 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6282 @ifnottex
6283 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6284 @end ifnottex
6285
6286 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6287 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6288 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6289 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6290
6291 @smallexample
6292 @group
6293 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6294 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6295 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6296 @end group
6297 @end smallexample
6298
6299 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6300 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6301 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6302 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6303 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6304 `overflow', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6305 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6306 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6307 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6308
6309 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6310
6311 @node Large buffer case, Small buffer case, Disentangle beginning-of-buffer, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6312 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6313 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6314
6315 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6316 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6317 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6318 that comes from the let expression.
6319
6320 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6321 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6322 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6323 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6324 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6325 attention to an `accessible' part.)
6326
6327 @need 800
6328 The line looks like this:
6329
6330 @smallexample
6331 (if (> size 10000)
6332 @end smallexample
6333
6334 @need 1200
6335 @noindent
6336 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6337 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6338
6339 @smallexample
6340 @group
6341 (*
6342 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6343 (/ size 10))
6344 @end group
6345 @end smallexample
6346
6347 @noindent
6348 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6349 @code{*}.
6350
6351 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6352 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6353 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6354 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6355 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6356 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6357
6358 @findex / @r{(division)}
6359 @cindex Division
6360 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6361 the numeric value by ten --- the numeric value of the size of the
6362 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6363 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6364 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6365 multiplication.)
6366
6367 @need 1200
6368 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6369 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6370
6371 @smallexample
6372 @group
6373 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6374 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6375 @end group
6376 @end smallexample
6377
6378 @noindent
6379 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6380 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6381
6382 @need 1200
6383 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6384 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6385
6386 @smallexample
6387 @group
6388 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6389 (/ size 10)))
6390 @end group
6391 @end smallexample
6392
6393 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6394
6395 @node Small buffer case, , Large buffer case, beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6396 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6397 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6398
6399 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6400 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6401 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6402 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6403 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6404
6405 @need 800
6406 The code looks like this:
6407
6408 @c Keep this on one line.
6409 @smallexample
6410 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6411 @end smallexample
6412
6413 @need 1200
6414 @noindent
6415 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6416 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6417 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6418 enclosing expression:
6419
6420 @smallexample
6421 @group
6422 (/
6423 (+ 10
6424 (*
6425 size
6426 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6427 10))
6428 @end group
6429 @end smallexample
6430
6431 @need 1200
6432 @noindent
6433 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6434 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6435 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6436 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6437
6438 @smallexample
6439 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6440 @end smallexample
6441
6442 @noindent
6443 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6444 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6445 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6446 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6447 position in the buffer.
6448
6449 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6450 the cursor is moved to that point.
6451
6452 @need 1500
6453 @node beginning-of-buffer complete, , beginning-of-buffer opt arg, beginning-of-buffer
6454 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6455 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6456
6457 @need 1000
6458 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6459 @sp 1
6460
6461 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6462 @smallexample
6463 @group
6464 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6465 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6466 leave mark at previous position.
6467 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6468 do not set mark at previous position.
6469 With numeric arg N,
6470 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6471
6472 If the buffer is narrowed,
6473 this command uses the beginning and size
6474 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6475 @end group
6476
6477 @group
6478 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6479 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6480 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6481 (interactive "P")
6482 (or (consp arg)
6483 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6484 (push-mark))
6485 @end group
6486 @group
6487 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6488 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6489 (+ (point-min)
6490 (if (> size 10000)
6491 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6492 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6493 (/ size 10))
6494 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6495 10)))
6496 (point-min))))
6497 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6498 @end group
6499 @end smallexample
6500
6501 @ignore
6502 From before GNU Emacs 22
6503 @smallexample
6504 @group
6505 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6506 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6507 leave mark at previous position.
6508 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6509 from the true beginning.
6510 @end group
6511 @group
6512 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6513 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6514 and does not set the mark."
6515 (interactive "P")
6516 (push-mark)
6517 @end group
6518 @group
6519 (goto-char
6520 (if arg
6521 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6522 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6523 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6524 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6525 @end group
6526 @group
6527 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6528 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6529 10))
6530 (point-min)))
6531 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6532 @end group
6533 @end smallexample
6534 @end ignore
6535
6536 @noindent
6537 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6538 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6539 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6540 the function.
6541
6542 @need 800
6543 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6544
6545 @smallexample
6546 \\[universal-argument]
6547 @end smallexample
6548
6549 @noindent
6550 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6551 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6552 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6553 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6554 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6555 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6556 information.)
6557
6558 @need 1200
6559 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6560 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6561 invoked with an argument:
6562
6563 @smallexample
6564 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6565 @end smallexample
6566
6567 @noindent
6568 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6569 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6570 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6571 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6572 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6573 to draw complaints.
6574
6575 On the other hand, it also means that if you specify the command with
6576 a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number, that is to say, if the `raw prefix
6577 argument' is simply a cons cell, then the command puts you at the
6578 beginning of the second line @dots{} I don't know whether this is
6579 intended or whether no one has dealt with the code to avoid this
6580 happening.
6581
6582 @node Second Buffer Related Review, optional Exercise, beginning-of-buffer, More Complex
6583 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6584 @section Review
6585
6586 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6587
6588 @table @code
6589 @item or
6590 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6591 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6592 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6593 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6594 others are true.
6595
6596 @item and
6597 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6598 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6599 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6600 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6601 true.
6602
6603 @item &optional
6604 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6605 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6606 argument, if desired.
6607
6608 @item prefix-numeric-value
6609 Convert the `raw prefix argument' produced by @code{(interactive
6610 "P")} to a numeric value.
6611
6612 @item forward-line
6613 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6614 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6615 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6616 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6617 supposed to move but couldn't.
6618
6619 @item erase-buffer
6620 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6621
6622 @item bufferp
6623 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6624 @end table
6625
6626 @node optional Exercise, , Second Buffer Related Review, More Complex
6627 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6628
6629 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6630 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6631 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6632 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6633 56 as a default value.
6634
6635 @node Narrowing & Widening, car cdr & cons, More Complex, Top
6636 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6637 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6638 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6639 @cindex Narrowing
6640 @cindex Widening
6641
6642 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6643 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6644 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6645 novices.
6646
6647 @menu
6648 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6649 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6650 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6651 * narrow Exercise::
6652 @end menu
6653
6654 @node Narrowing advantages, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening, Narrowing & Widening
6655 @ifnottex
6656 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6657 @end ifnottex
6658
6659 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6660 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6661 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6662 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6663 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6664 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6665 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6666 narrowing just to the region you want.
6667 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6668
6669 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6670 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6671 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6672 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6673 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6674 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6675 @code{widen} command.
6676 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6677
6678 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6679 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6680 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6681 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6682 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6683 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6684 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function, which is called by
6685 @code{what-line}, uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6686 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6687 situation.
6688
6689 @node save-restriction, what-line, Narrowing advantages, Narrowing & Widening
6690 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6691 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6692 @findex save-restriction
6693
6694 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6695 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6696 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6697 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6698 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6699 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6700 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6701 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6702 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6703 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6704 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6705 function.
6706
6707 @need 1250
6708 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6709
6710 @smallexample
6711 @group
6712 (save-restriction
6713 @var{body}@dots{} )
6714 @end group
6715 @end smallexample
6716
6717 @noindent
6718 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6719 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6720
6721 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6722 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6723 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6724 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6725 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6726 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6727 like this:
6728
6729 @smallexample
6730 @group
6731 (save-excursion
6732 (save-restriction
6733 @var{body}@dots{}))
6734 @end group
6735 @end smallexample
6736
6737 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6738 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6739 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6740
6741 @need 1250
6742 For example,
6743
6744 @smallexample
6745 @group
6746 (save-restriction
6747 (widen)
6748 (save-excursion
6749 @var{body}@dots{}))
6750 @end group
6751 @end smallexample
6752
6753 @ignore
6754 Emacs 22
6755 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6756
6757 (defun what-line ()
6758 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6759 (interactive)
6760 (let ((start (point-min))
6761 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6762 (if (= start 1)
6763 (message "Line %d" n)
6764 (save-excursion
6765 (save-restriction
6766 (widen)
6767 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6768 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6769
6770 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6771 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6772 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6773 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6774 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6775 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6776 (save-excursion
6777 (goto-char (point-min))
6778 (setq start (point))
6779 (goto-char opoint)
6780 (forward-line 0)
6781 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6782
6783 (defun count-lines (start end)
6784 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6785 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6786 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6787 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6788 (save-excursion
6789 (save-restriction
6790 (narrow-to-region start end)
6791 (goto-char (point-min))
6792 (if (eq selective-display t)
6793 (save-match-data
6794 (let ((done 0))
6795 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6796 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6797 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6798 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6799 (goto-char (point-max))
6800 (if (and (/= start end)
6801 (not (bolp)))
6802 (1+ done)
6803 done)))
6804 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6805 @end ignore
6806
6807 @node what-line, narrow Exercise, save-restriction, Narrowing & Widening
6808 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6809 @section @code{what-line}
6810 @findex what-line
6811 @cindex Widening, example of
6812
6813 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6814 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6815 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6816 original text of the function:
6817
6818 @smallexample
6819 @group
6820 (defun what-line ()
6821 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6822 (interactive)
6823 (save-restriction
6824 (widen)
6825 (save-excursion
6826 (beginning-of-line)
6827 (message "Line %d"
6828 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6829 @end group
6830 @end smallexample
6831
6832 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6833 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6834 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6835 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6836 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6837 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6838 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6839 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6840
6841 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6842 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6843 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6844 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6845
6846 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6847 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6848 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6849
6850 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6851 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6852 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6853
6854 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6855 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6856 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6857 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6858 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6859 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6860 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6861 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6862 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6863
6864 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6865 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) and of the mark, and
6866 restores them after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6867 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6868
6869 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6870 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6871 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6872 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6873
6874 @need 1200
6875 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6876 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6877 echo area.
6878
6879 @smallexample
6880 @group
6881 (message "Line %d"
6882 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6883 @end group
6884 @end smallexample
6885
6886 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6887 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6888 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6889 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6890 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6891 @samp{Line 243}.
6892
6893 @need 1200
6894 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6895 last line of the function:
6896
6897 @smallexample
6898 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6899 @end smallexample
6900
6901 @ignore
6902 GNU Emacs 22
6903
6904 (defun count-lines (start end)
6905 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6906 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6907 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6908 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6909 (save-excursion
6910 (save-restriction
6911 (narrow-to-region start end)
6912 (goto-char (point-min))
6913 (if (eq selective-display t)
6914 (save-match-data
6915 (let ((done 0))
6916 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6917 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6918 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6919 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6920 (goto-char (point-max))
6921 (if (and (/= start end)
6922 (not (bolp)))
6923 (1+ done)
6924 done)))
6925 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6926 @end ignore
6927
6928 @noindent
6929 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6930 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6931 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6932 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6933 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6934 current line.
6935
6936 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6937 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point and
6938 mark to their original positions; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6939 the original narrowing, if any.
6940
6941 @node narrow Exercise, , what-line, Narrowing & Widening
6942 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6943
6944 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6945 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6946 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6947 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6948 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6949 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6950 @code{buffer-substring}.
6951
6952 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6953 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6954 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6955 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6956 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6957 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6958 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6959 Manual}.)
6960
6961 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6962 Or can you write the function without them?
6963
6964 @node car cdr & cons, Cutting & Storing Text, Narrowing & Widening, Top
6965 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
6966 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6967 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6968 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6969
6970 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6971 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6972 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6973
6974 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6975 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6976 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6977
6978 @menu
6979 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6980 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6981 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6982 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6983 * nth::
6984 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6985 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6986 * cons Exercise::
6987 @end menu
6988
6989 @node Strange Names, car & cdr, car cdr & cons, car cdr & cons
6990 @ifnottex
6991 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6992 @end ifnottex
6993
6994 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6995 abbreviation of the word `construct'. The origins of the names for
6996 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6997 is an acronym from the phrase `Contents of the Address part of the
6998 Register'; and @code{cdr} (pronounced `could-er') is an acronym from
6999 the phrase `Contents of the Decrement part of the Register'. These
7000 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
7001 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
7002 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
7003 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
7004 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
7005 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
7006 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
7007 introduction.
7008
7009 @node car & cdr, cons, Strange Names, car cdr & cons
7010 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7011 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7012
7013 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
7014 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
7015 @code{rose}.
7016
7017 @need 1200
7018 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
7019 evaluating the following:
7020
7021 @smallexample
7022 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7023 @end smallexample
7024
7025 @noindent
7026 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
7027 area.
7028
7029 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
7030 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
7031
7032 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
7033 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
7034 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
7035 `non-destructive'. This feature turns out to be important.
7036
7037 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
7038 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
7039 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
7040 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
7041 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
7042 buttercup)}.
7043
7044 @need 800
7045 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
7046
7047 @smallexample
7048 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
7049 @end smallexample
7050
7051 @noindent
7052 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
7053 the echo area.
7054
7055 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
7056 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
7057 elements are.
7058
7059 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
7060 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
7061 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
7062
7063 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
7064
7065 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
7066 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
7067 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
7068 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
7069 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
7070 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
7071 after you will be grateful to you.)
7072
7073 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
7074 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
7075 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
7076 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
7077 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
7078 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
7079 the usual way:
7080
7081 @smallexample
7082 @group
7083 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
7084
7085 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7086 @end group
7087 @end smallexample
7088
7089 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
7090 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
7091 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
7092 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
7093
7094 @smallexample
7095 @group
7096 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
7097 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7098 (whale dolphin seal)))
7099 @end group
7100 @end smallexample
7101
7102 @noindent
7103 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
7104 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
7105 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
7106
7107 @smallexample
7108 @group
7109 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
7110 (gazelle antelope zebra)
7111 (whale dolphin seal)))
7112 @end group
7113 @end smallexample
7114
7115 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
7116 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
7117 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
7118
7119 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
7120 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
7121 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
7122 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
7123 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
7124 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
7125 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
7126 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
7127 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
7128 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
7129 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
7130 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7131
7132 @node cons, nthcdr, car & cdr, car cdr & cons
7133 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7134 @section @code{cons}
7135 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
7136
7137 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
7138 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
7139 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
7140
7141 @smallexample
7142 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
7143 @end smallexample
7144
7145 @need 800
7146 @noindent
7147 After evaluating this list, you will see
7148
7149 @smallexample
7150 (pine fir oak maple)
7151 @end smallexample
7152
7153 @noindent
7154 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
7155 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
7156 list.
7157
7158 We often say that `@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
7159 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list', but this
7160 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
7161 existing list, but creates a new one.
7162
7163 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
7164
7165 @menu
7166 * Build a list::
7167 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
7168 @end menu
7169
7170 @node Build a list, length, cons, cons
7171 @ifnottex
7172 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7173 @end ifnottex
7174
7175 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7176 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7177 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7178 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7179 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7180 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7181 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7182 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7183 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7184 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as `evaluates to'.
7185
7186 @smallexample
7187 @group
7188 (cons 'buttercup ())
7189 @result{} (buttercup)
7190 @end group
7191
7192 @group
7193 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7194 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7195 @end group
7196
7197 @group
7198 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7199 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7200 @end group
7201
7202 @group
7203 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7204 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7205 @end group
7206 @end smallexample
7207
7208 @noindent
7209 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7210 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7211 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7212 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7213 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7214 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7215
7216 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7217 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7218 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7219 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7220
7221 @node length, , Build a list, cons
7222 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7223 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7224 @findex length
7225
7226 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7227 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7228
7229 @smallexample
7230 @group
7231 (length '(buttercup))
7232 @result{} 1
7233 @end group
7234
7235 @group
7236 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7237 @result{} 2
7238 @end group
7239
7240 @group
7241 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7242 @result{} 3
7243 @end group
7244 @end smallexample
7245
7246 @noindent
7247 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7248 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7249 its argument.
7250
7251 @need 1200
7252 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7253 empty list:
7254
7255 @smallexample
7256 @group
7257 (length ())
7258 @result{} 0
7259 @end group
7260 @end smallexample
7261
7262 @noindent
7263 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7264
7265 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7266 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7267 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7268
7269 @smallexample
7270 (length )
7271 @end smallexample
7272
7273 @need 800
7274 @noindent
7275 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7276
7277 @smallexample
7278 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7279 @end smallexample
7280
7281 @noindent
7282 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7283 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7284 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7285 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7286 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7287
7288 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7289 the function.
7290
7291 @ignore
7292 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7293
7294 In an earlier version:
7295 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7296 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7297 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7298 abbreviation for `subroutine'.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7299 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7300 about subroutines.
7301 @end ignore
7302
7303 @node nthcdr, nth, cons, car cdr & cons
7304 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7305 @section @code{nthcdr}
7306 @findex nthcdr
7307
7308 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7309 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7310
7311 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7312 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7313 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7314 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7315 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7316 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7317 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7318 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7319 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7320
7321 @need 1200
7322 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7323 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7324
7325 @smallexample
7326 @group
7327 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7328 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7329 @end group
7330
7331 @group
7332 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7333 @result{} (oak maple)
7334 @end group
7335
7336 @group
7337 (cdr '(oak maple))
7338 @result{}(maple)
7339 @end group
7340
7341 @group
7342 (cdr '(maple))
7343 @result{} nil
7344 @end group
7345
7346 @group
7347 (cdr 'nil)
7348 @result{} nil
7349 @end group
7350
7351 @group
7352 (cdr ())
7353 @result{} nil
7354 @end group
7355 @end smallexample
7356
7357 @need 1200
7358 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7359 between, like this:
7360
7361 @smallexample
7362 @group
7363 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7364 @result{} (oak maple)
7365 @end group
7366 @end smallexample
7367
7368 @noindent
7369 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7370 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7371 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7372 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7373 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7374 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7375 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7376 first two elements.
7377
7378 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7379 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7380 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7381 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7382 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7383
7384 @smallexample
7385 @group
7386 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7387 @result{} (oak maple)
7388 @end group
7389 @end smallexample
7390
7391 @need 1200
7392 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7393 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7394 and 5:
7395
7396 @smallexample
7397 @group
7398 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7399 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7400 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7401 @end group
7402
7403 @group
7404 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7405 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7406 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7407 @end group
7408
7409 @group
7410 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7411 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7412 @result{} (maple)
7413 @end group
7414
7415 @group
7416 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7417 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7418 @result{} nil
7419 @end group
7420
7421 @group
7422 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7423 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7424 @result{} nil
7425 @end group
7426 @end smallexample
7427
7428 @node nth, setcar, nthcdr, car cdr & cons
7429 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7430 @section @code{nth}
7431 @findex nth
7432
7433 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7434 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7435 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7436
7437 @need 1500
7438 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7439 @code{nth} would be:
7440
7441 @smallexample
7442 @group
7443 (defun nth (n list)
7444 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7445 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7446 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7447 @end group
7448 @end smallexample
7449
7450 @noindent
7451 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7452 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7453
7454 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7455 This can be very convenient.
7456
7457 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7458 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7459 This is called `zero-based' counting and often bothers people who
7460 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7461 is `one-based'.
7462
7463 @need 1250
7464 For example:
7465
7466 @smallexample
7467 @group
7468 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7469 @result{} "one"
7470
7471 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7472 @result{} "two"
7473 @end group
7474 @end smallexample
7475
7476 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7477 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7478 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7479 @code{setcdr} functions.
7480
7481 @node setcar, setcdr, nth, car cdr & cons
7482 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7483 @section @code{setcar}
7484 @findex setcar
7485
7486 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7487 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7488 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7489 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7490 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7491
7492 @need 1200
7493 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7494 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7495
7496 @smallexample
7497 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7498 @end smallexample
7499
7500 @noindent
7501 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7502 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7503 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7504 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7505 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7506 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7507 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7508 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7509 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7510 parenthesis.)
7511
7512 @need 1200
7513 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7514 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7515
7516 @smallexample
7517 @group
7518 animals
7519 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7520 @end group
7521 @end smallexample
7522
7523 @noindent
7524 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7525 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7526
7527 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7528 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7529 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7530 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7531 usual fashion:
7532
7533 @smallexample
7534 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7535 @end smallexample
7536
7537 @need 1200
7538 @noindent
7539 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7540 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7541
7542 @smallexample
7543 @group
7544 animals
7545 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7546 @end group
7547 @end smallexample
7548
7549 @noindent
7550 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7551 @code{hippopotamus}.
7552
7553 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7554 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7555 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7556
7557 @node setcdr, cons Exercise, setcar, car cdr & cons
7558 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7559 @section @code{setcdr}
7560 @findex setcdr
7561
7562 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7563 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7564 a list rather than the first element.
7565
7566 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7567 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7568 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7569
7570 @need 1200
7571 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7572 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7573
7574 @smallexample
7575 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7576 @end smallexample
7577
7578 @need 1200
7579 @noindent
7580 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7581 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7582
7583 @smallexample
7584 @group
7585 domesticated-animals
7586 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7587 @end group
7588 @end smallexample
7589
7590 @need 1200
7591 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7592 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7593 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7594
7595 @smallexample
7596 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7597 @end smallexample
7598
7599 @noindent
7600 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7601 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7602 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7603 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7604
7605 @smallexample
7606 @group
7607 domesticated-animals
7608 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7609 @end group
7610 @end smallexample
7611
7612 @noindent
7613 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7614 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7615 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7616
7617 @node cons Exercise, , setcdr, car cdr & cons
7618 @section Exercise
7619
7620 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7621 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7622 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7623 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7624
7625 @node Cutting & Storing Text, List Implementation, car cdr & cons, Top
7626 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7627 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7628 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7629 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7630 @cindex Killing text
7631 @cindex Clipping text
7632 @cindex Erasing text
7633 @cindex Deleting text
7634
7635 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in
7636 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7637 `yank' command.
7638
7639 (The use of the word `kill' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7640 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7641 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be `clip' since
7642 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7643 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7644 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of `kill' in the Emacs
7645 sources with `clip' and all occurrences of `killed' with `clipped'.)
7646
7647 @menu
7648 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7649 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7650 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7651 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7652 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7653 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7654 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7655 * search Exercises::
7656 @end menu
7657
7658 @node Storing Text, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7659 @ifnottex
7660 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7661 @end ifnottex
7662
7663 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7664 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7665 look like this:
7666
7667 @smallexample
7668 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7669 @end smallexample
7670
7671 @need 1200
7672 @noindent
7673 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7674 of text (an `atom', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7675 this:
7676
7677 @smallexample
7678 @group
7679 (cons "another piece"
7680 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7681 @end group
7682 @end smallexample
7683
7684 @need 1200
7685 @noindent
7686 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7687 the echo area:
7688
7689 @smallexample
7690 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7691 @end smallexample
7692
7693 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7694 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7695 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7696 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7697 second element of the original list:
7698
7699 @smallexample
7700 @group
7701 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7702 "a piece of text"
7703 "previous piece")))
7704 @result{} "a piece of text"
7705 @end group
7706 @end smallexample
7707
7708 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7709 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7710 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7711 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7712 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7713 than nothing at all.
7714
7715 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7716 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7717 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7718 function uses (or `calls') a function that invokes a function that
7719 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7720 climb the foothills.
7721
7722 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7723 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7724
7725 @node zap-to-char, kill-region, Storing Text, Cutting & Storing Text
7726 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7727 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7728 @findex zap-to-char
7729
7730 @c FIXME remove obsolete stuff
7731 The @code{zap-to-char} function changed little between GNU Emacs
7732 version 19 and GNU Emacs version 22. However, @code{zap-to-char}
7733 calls another function, @code{kill-region}, which enjoyed a major
7734 rewrite.
7735
7736 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 19 is complex, but does not
7737 use code that is important at this time. We will skip it.
7738
7739 The @code{kill-region} function in Emacs 22 is easier to read than the
7740 same function in Emacs 19 and introduces a very important concept,
7741 that of error handling. We will walk through the function.
7742
7743 But first, let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7744
7745 @menu
7746 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7747 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7748 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7749 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7750 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7751 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7752 @end menu
7753
7754 @node Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7755 @ifnottex
7756 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7757 @end ifnottex
7758
7759 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7760 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7761 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7762 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7763 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7764 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7765 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7766 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7767 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7768 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7769
7770 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7771 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7772 any text.
7773
7774 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7775 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7776 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7777 deletion command.
7778
7779 @ignore
7780 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7781 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7782 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7783 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7784 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7785 (kill-region (point)
7786 (progn
7787 (search-forward
7788 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7789 (point))))
7790 @end ignore
7791
7792 @need 1250
7793 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7794
7795 @c GNU Emacs 22
7796 @smallexample
7797 @group
7798 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7799 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7800 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7801 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7802 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7803 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7804 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7805 (kill-region (point) (progn
7806 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7807 nil nil arg)
7808 (point))))
7809 @end group
7810 @end smallexample
7811
7812 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7813 of the word `kill'.
7814
7815 @node zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char body, Complete zap-to-char, zap-to-char
7816 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7817 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7818
7819 @need 800
7820 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7821 this:
7822
7823 @smallexample
7824 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7825 @end smallexample
7826
7827 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7828 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7829 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7830 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7831 passed the value of a `processed prefix'. The prefix argument is
7832 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7833 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7834 this argument.
7835
7836 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7837 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7838 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7839 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7840 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7841 make it look good).
7842
7843 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7844 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7845
7846 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7847 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7848 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7849 beep or blink at you.
7850
7851 @node zap-to-char body, search-forward, zap-to-char interactive, zap-to-char
7852 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7853 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7854
7855 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7856 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7857 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7858
7859 The first part of the code looks like this:
7860
7861 @smallexample
7862 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7863 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7864 (kill-region (point) (progn
7865 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7866 (point)))
7867 @end smallexample
7868
7869 @noindent
7870 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7871 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7872 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7873 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7874 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7875 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7876 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7877 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7878
7879 @noindent
7880 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7881
7882 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7883 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7884 @code{point}.
7885
7886 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7887 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7888 then at @code{progn}.
7889
7890 @node search-forward, progn, zap-to-char body, zap-to-char
7891 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7892 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7893 @findex search-forward
7894
7895 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7896 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7897 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7898 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7899 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7900 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7901 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7902 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7903 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7904 (Moving point is therefore a `side effect'.)
7905
7906 @need 1250
7907 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7908
7909 @smallexample
7910 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7911 @end smallexample
7912
7913 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7914
7915 @enumerate
7916 @item
7917 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7918 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7919
7920 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7921 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7922 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7923 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7924 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7925 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7926 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7927 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7928 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7929 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7930 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7931 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7932
7933 @item
7934 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7935 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7936 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7937
7938 @item
7939 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7940 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7941 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7942 signal an error when the search fails.
7943
7944 @item
7945 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7946 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7947 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7948 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7949 backwards.
7950 @end enumerate
7951
7952 @need 800
7953 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7954
7955 @smallexample
7956 @group
7957 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7958 @var{limit-of-search}
7959 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7960 @var{repeat-count})
7961 @end group
7962 @end smallexample
7963
7964 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7965
7966 @node progn, Summing up zap-to-char, search-forward, zap-to-char
7967 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
7968 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7969 @findex progn
7970
7971 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7972 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7973 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7974 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7975
7976 @need 800
7977 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7978
7979 @smallexample
7980 @group
7981 (progn
7982 @var{body}@dots{})
7983 @end group
7984 @end smallexample
7985
7986 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7987 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7988 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7989
7990 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7991 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7992 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7993 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7994 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7995 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7996
7997 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7998 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7999 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
8000 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
8001 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
8002 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
8003 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
8004 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
8005 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
8006
8007 @node Summing up zap-to-char, , progn, zap-to-char
8008 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8009 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
8010
8011 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
8012 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
8013
8014 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
8015 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
8016 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
8017 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
8018 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
8019 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
8020 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
8021
8022 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
8023 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
8024 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
8025 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
8026 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
8027 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
8028
8029 @node kill-region, copy-region-as-kill, zap-to-char, Cutting & Storing Text
8030 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8031 @section @code{kill-region}
8032 @findex kill-region
8033
8034 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
8035 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
8036 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
8037
8038 @ignore
8039 GNU Emacs 22:
8040
8041 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
8042 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8043 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8044 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
8045 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
8046
8047 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
8048 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
8049
8050 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
8051 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
8052 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
8053
8054 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
8055 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
8056 to be killed.
8057 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
8058 If the previous command was also a kill command,
8059 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
8060 to make one entry in the kill ring.
8061
8062 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
8063 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
8064 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
8065 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
8066 ;; when calling kill-append.
8067 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8068 (unless (and beg end)
8069 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8070 (condition-case nil
8071 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8072 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8073 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8074 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8075 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8076 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8077 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8078 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8079 nil)
8080 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
8081 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
8082 ;; in the region, are read-only.
8083 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
8084 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
8085 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
8086 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8087 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
8088 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8089 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
8090 (if kill-read-only-ok
8091 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8092 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
8093 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8094 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8095 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8096 @end ignore
8097
8098 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
8099 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
8100 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
8101
8102 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
8103 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
8104 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
8105 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
8106 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
8107
8108 @menu
8109 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
8110 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
8111 * Lisp macro::
8112 @end menu
8113
8114 @node Complete kill-region, condition-case, kill-region, kill-region
8115 @ifnottex
8116 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
8117 @end ifnottex
8118
8119 @need 1200
8120 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
8121 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
8122 added:
8123
8124 @c GNU Emacs 22:
8125 @smallexample
8126 @group
8127 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8128 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
8129 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
8130 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
8131 @end group
8132
8133 @group
8134 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
8135 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
8136 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
8137 ;; `unless' is an `if' without a then-part.
8138 (unless (and beg end)
8139 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
8140 @end group
8141
8142 @group
8143 ;; @bullet{} `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8144 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8145 ;; information about the error signal is not
8146 ;; stored for use by another function.
8147 (condition-case nil
8148 @end group
8149
8150 @group
8151 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to `condition-case' tells the
8152 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8153 @end group
8154
8155 @group
8156 ;; It starts with a `let' function that extracts the string
8157 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
8158 ;; `when' checks), it calls an `if' function that determines
8159 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
8160 ;; `kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
8161 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
8162 ;; `kill-new', is called.
8163 @end group
8164
8165 @group
8166 ;; The `kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
8167 ;; the old. The `kill-new' function inserts text into a new
8168 ;; item in the kill ring.
8169 @end group
8170
8171 @group
8172 ;; `when' is an `if' without an else-part. The second `when'
8173 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
8174 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
8175 ;; another call to `kill-region'. If one or the other
8176 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
8177 ;; be `kill-region'.
8178 @end group
8179 @group
8180 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
8181 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
8182 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
8183 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8184 @end group
8185 @group
8186 ;; @minus{} `yank-handler' is an optional argument to
8187 ;; `kill-region' that tells the `kill-append' and
8188 ;; `kill-new' functions how deal with properties
8189 ;; added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8190 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8191 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
8192 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
8193 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8194 nil)
8195 @end group
8196
8197 @group
8198 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8199 ;; what to do with an error.
8200 @end group
8201 @group
8202 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8203 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8204 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8205 ;; then the body is executed.
8206 @end group
8207 @group
8208 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8209 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8210 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8211 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8212 @end group
8213 @group
8214 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8215 ;; it will be set in an error
8216 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8217 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8218 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8219 ;; don't if you may not.
8220 @end group
8221 @group
8222 (if kill-read-only-ok
8223 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8224 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8225 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8226 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8227 @end group
8228 @end smallexample
8229
8230 @ignore
8231 @c v 21
8232 @smallexample
8233 @group
8234 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8235 "Kill between point and mark.
8236 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8237 (interactive "r")
8238 @end group
8239
8240 @group
8241 ;; 1. `condition-case' takes three arguments.
8242 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8243 ;; information about the error signal is not
8244 ;; stored for use by another function.
8245 (condition-case nil
8246 @end group
8247
8248 @group
8249 ;; 2. The second argument to `condition-case'
8250 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8251 @end group
8252
8253 @group
8254 ;; The `delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8255 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8256 ;; the same, then the variable `string' will be empty, or nil
8257 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8258 @end group
8259
8260 @group
8261 ;; `when' is an `if' clause that cannot take an `else-part'.
8262 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of `last-command' to the
8263 ;; previous command.
8264 @end group
8265 @group
8266 ;; `kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8267 ;; `kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8268 (when string
8269 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8270 ;; if true, prepend string
8271 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8272 (kill-new string)))
8273 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8274 @end group
8275
8276 @group
8277 ;; 3. The third argument to `condition-case' tells the interpreter
8278 ;; what to do with an error.
8279 @end group
8280 @group
8281 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8282 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8283 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8284 ;; then the body is executed.
8285 @end group
8286 @group
8287 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8288 ;; then...
8289 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8290 @end group
8291 @group
8292 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8293 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8294 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8295 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8296 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8297 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8298 @end group
8299 @end smallexample
8300 @end ignore
8301
8302 @node condition-case, Lisp macro, Complete kill-region, kill-region
8303 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8304 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8305 @findex condition-case
8306
8307 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8308 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8309 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8310 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8311 shows you a message.
8312
8313 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8314 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8315 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8316 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8317 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8318 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8319 special form.
8320
8321 @need 800
8322 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8323
8324 @smallexample
8325 @group
8326 (condition-case
8327 @var{var}
8328 @var{bodyform}
8329 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8330 @end group
8331 @end smallexample
8332
8333 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8334 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8335 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8336 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8337
8338 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8339 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8340 correctly.
8341
8342 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8343 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8344 names.
8345
8346 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition case}.
8347 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8348 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8349 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8350 part of the error handler is run.
8351
8352 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8353 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8354
8355 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8356 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8357 handler is run.
8358
8359 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8360 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8361 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8362 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8363 discarded.
8364
8365 @need 1200
8366 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8367 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8368
8369 @smallexample
8370 @group
8371 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8372 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8373 @end group
8374 @end smallexample
8375
8376 @ignore
8377 2006 Oct 24
8378 In Emacs 22,
8379 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8380 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8381 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8382 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8383
8384 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8385 this is line 8054
8386 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8387 @end ignore
8388
8389 @node Lisp macro, , condition-case, kill-region
8390 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8391 @subsection Lisp macro
8392 @cindex Macro, lisp
8393 @cindex Lisp macro
8394
8395 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8396 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8397 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8398 text that exists.
8399
8400 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8401 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8402 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8403 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8404
8405 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp @dfn{macro}
8406 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8407 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8408 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8409 `other expression' is an @code{if} expression.
8410
8411 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8412 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8413 an @code{if} without a then clause
8414
8415 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8416 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8417 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8418
8419 @ignore
8420 We will briefly look at C macros in
8421 @ref{Digression into C}.
8422 @end ignore
8423
8424 @need 1200
8425 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8426 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8427 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8428 and an else-part.
8429
8430 @smallexample
8431 @group
8432 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8433 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8434 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8435 @end group
8436 @end smallexample
8437
8438 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8439 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8440
8441 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8442 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8443 with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'.
8444
8445 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8446 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8447 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8448
8449 @need 1200
8450 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8451 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8452
8453 @smallexample
8454 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8455 @end smallexample
8456
8457 @noindent
8458 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8459 clipped text in the kill ring.
8460
8461 @node copy-region-as-kill, Digression into C, kill-region, Cutting & Storing Text
8462 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8463 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8464 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8465 @findex nthcdr
8466
8467 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8468 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8469 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8470
8471 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8472 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8473 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8474 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8475 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8476 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8477
8478 @menu
8479 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8480 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8481 @end menu
8482
8483 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8484 @ifnottex
8485 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8486 @end ifnottex
8487
8488 @need 1200
8489 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8490 function:
8491
8492 @smallexample
8493 @group
8494 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8495 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8496 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8497 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8498 system cut and paste."
8499 (interactive "r")
8500 @end group
8501 @group
8502 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8503 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8504 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8505 @end group
8506 @group
8507 (if transient-mark-mode
8508 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8509 nil)
8510 @end group
8511 @end smallexample
8512
8513 @need 800
8514 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8515
8516 @smallexample
8517 @group
8518 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8519 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8520 (interactive "r")
8521 @var{body}@dots{})
8522 @end group
8523 @end smallexample
8524
8525 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8526 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8527 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading though this
8528 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8529 almost becoming routine.
8530
8531 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8532 word `kill' has a meaning different from usual. The `Transient Mark'
8533 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8534 side-effects.
8535
8536 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8537 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8538 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8539 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8540 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8541 highlighted.)
8542
8543 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8544 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8545 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8546 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8547 ring.
8548
8549 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8550 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8551 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8552 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8553 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8554 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8555 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8556
8557 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8558 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8559
8560 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8561
8562 @node copy-region-as-kill body, , Complete copy-region-as-kill, copy-region-as-kill
8563 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
8564 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8565
8566 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8567 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8568 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8569 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8570 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8571 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8572 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8573 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8574 order.
8575
8576 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8577 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8578 previous Emacs command.
8579
8580 @menu
8581 * last-command & this-command::
8582 * kill-append function::
8583 * kill-new function::
8584 @end menu
8585
8586 @node last-command & this-command, kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body, copy-region-as-kill body
8587 @ifnottex
8588 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8589 @end ifnottex
8590
8591 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8592 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8593 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8594 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8595 @code{this-command}.
8596
8597 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8598 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8599 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8600 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8601 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8602 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8603 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8604 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8605 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8606 function.
8607
8608 @need 1250
8609 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8610
8611 @smallexample
8612 @group
8613 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8614 ;; @r{then-part}
8615 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8616 ;; @r{else-part}
8617 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8618 @end group
8619 @end smallexample
8620
8621 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8622 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8623 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8624 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8625 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8626 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8627 properties were implemented.)
8628
8629 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8630 @noindent
8631 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8632 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8633 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8634 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8635 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8636 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8637 expressions are the same.
8638
8639 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8640 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8641
8642 @node kill-append function, kill-new function, last-command & this-command, copy-region-as-kill body
8643 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8644 @findex kill-append
8645
8646 @need 800
8647 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8648
8649 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8650 @smallexample
8651 @group
8652 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8653 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8654 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8655 @dots{} "
8656 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8657 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8658 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8659 (equal yank-handler
8660 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8661 yank-handler)))
8662 @end group
8663 @end smallexample
8664
8665 @ignore
8666 was:
8667 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8668 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8669 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8670 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8671 it."
8672 (kill-new (if before-p
8673 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8674 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8675 t))
8676 @end ignore
8677
8678 @noindent
8679 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8680 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8681 a moment.
8682
8683 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8684 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8685 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as `bold' or
8686 `italics'.)
8687
8688 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8689 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8690 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8691 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8692 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8693
8694 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8695 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8696 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8697 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8698
8699 @smallexample
8700 @group
8701 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8702 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8703 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8704 @end group
8705 @end smallexample
8706
8707 @noindent
8708 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8709 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8710 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8711 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8712 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8713 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8714 previously saved text.
8715
8716 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8717 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8718 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8719 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8720 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8721 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8722 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8723 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8724 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8725 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8726 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8727 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8728 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8729 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8730
8731 @need 800
8732 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8733 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8734
8735 @smallexample
8736 (concat string cur)
8737 @end smallexample
8738
8739 @need 1200
8740 @noindent
8741 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8742 after the old text:
8743
8744 @smallexample
8745 (concat cur string))
8746 @end smallexample
8747
8748 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8749 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8750 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8751
8752 @smallexample
8753 @group
8754 (concat "abc" "def")
8755 @result{} "abcdef"
8756 @end group
8757
8758 @group
8759 (concat "new "
8760 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8761 @result{} "new first element"
8762
8763 (concat (car
8764 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8765 @result{} "first element modified"
8766 @end group
8767 @end smallexample
8768
8769 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8770 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8771 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8772 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8773
8774 @node kill-new function, , kill-append function, copy-region-as-kill body
8775 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8776 @findex kill-new
8777
8778 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8779 @ignore
8780 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8781 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8782 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8783 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8784
8785 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8786 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8787 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8788 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8789 @end ignore
8790 @need 1200
8791 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8792
8793 @smallexample
8794 @group
8795 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8796 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8797 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8798
8799 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8800 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8801 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8802 @dots{}"
8803 @end group
8804 @group
8805 (if (> (length string) 0)
8806 (if yank-handler
8807 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8808 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8809 (if yank-handler
8810 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8811 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8812 @end group
8813 @group
8814 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8815 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8816 @end group
8817 @group
8818 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8819 (setcar kill-ring string)
8820 (push string kill-ring)
8821 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8822 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8823 @end group
8824 @group
8825 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8826 (if interprogram-cut-function
8827 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8828 @end group
8829 @end smallexample
8830 @ignore
8831 was:
8832 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8833 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8834 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8835 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8836 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8837 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8838 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8839 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8840 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8841 (setcar kill-ring string)
8842 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8843 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8844 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8845 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8846 (if interprogram-cut-function
8847 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8848 @end ignore
8849
8850 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8851
8852 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8853
8854 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8855 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8856 added to the text, such as `bold' or `italics'. We will skip that.
8857
8858 @need 1200
8859 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8860
8861 @smallexample
8862 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8863 @end smallexample
8864
8865 @noindent
8866 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8867
8868 @noindent
8869 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8870 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8871 them below.
8872
8873 @need 1200
8874 The critical lines are these:
8875
8876 @smallexample
8877 @group
8878 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8879 ;; @r{then}
8880 (setcar kill-ring string)
8881 @end group
8882 @group
8883 ;; @r{else}
8884 (push string kill-ring)
8885 @end group
8886 @group
8887 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8888 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8889 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8890 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8891 @end group
8892 @group
8893 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8894 (if interprogram-cut-function
8895 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8896 @end group
8897 @end smallexample
8898
8899 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8900 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8901 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8902
8903 @need 1250
8904 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8905 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8906 expression is executed:
8907
8908 @smallexample
8909 (setcar kill-ring string)
8910 @end smallexample
8911
8912 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8913 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8914 first element.
8915
8916 @need 1250
8917 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8918 else-part of the condition is executed:
8919
8920 @smallexample
8921 (push string kill-ring)
8922 @end smallexample
8923
8924 @noindent
8925 @need 1250
8926 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8927 the older
8928
8929 @smallexample
8930 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8931 @end smallexample
8932
8933 @noindent
8934 @need 1250
8935 or the newer
8936
8937 @smallexample
8938 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8939 @end smallexample
8940
8941 @noindent
8942 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8943 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8944 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8945 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8946 ring from growing too long.
8947
8948 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8949
8950 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8951 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8952 kill ring.
8953
8954 We can see how this works with an example.
8955
8956 @need 800
8957 First,
8958
8959 @smallexample
8960 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8961 @end smallexample
8962
8963 @need 1200
8964 @noindent
8965 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8966 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8967
8968 @smallexample
8969 @group
8970 example-list
8971 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8972 @end group
8973 @end smallexample
8974
8975 @need 1200
8976 @noindent
8977 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8978 following expression:
8979 @findex push, @r{example}
8980
8981 @smallexample
8982 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8983 @end smallexample
8984
8985 @need 800
8986 @noindent
8987 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8988
8989 @smallexample
8990 @group
8991 example-list
8992 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8993 @end group
8994 @end smallexample
8995
8996 @noindent
8997 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8998
8999 @need 1200
9000 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
9001 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
9002
9003 @smallexample
9004 @group
9005 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
9006 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
9007 @end group
9008 @end smallexample
9009
9010 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
9011 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
9012 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
9013 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
9014 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
9015 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
9016
9017 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
9018 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
9019 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
9020 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
9021 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
9022 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
9023 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
9024 the last element of the kill ring.
9025
9026 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
9027 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
9028 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
9029 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
9030 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
9031
9032 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
9033 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
9034 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
9035 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
9036 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
9037 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
9038 @code{setcdr}}.)
9039
9040 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
9041 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
9042 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
9043 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
9044
9045 @smallexample
9046 @group
9047 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
9048 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
9049 @end group
9050
9051 @group
9052 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
9053 @result{} nil
9054
9055 trees
9056 @result{} (maple oak pine)
9057 @end group
9058 @end smallexample
9059
9060 @noindent
9061 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
9062 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
9063
9064 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
9065 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
9066 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
9067 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
9068 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
9069
9070 @need 800
9071 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
9072
9073 @smallexample
9074 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
9075 @end smallexample
9076
9077 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
9078 the @code{kill-ring}.
9079
9080 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
9081 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
9082 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
9083
9084 @need 1200
9085 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
9086
9087 @smallexample
9088 @group
9089 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
9090 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
9091 @end group
9092 @end smallexample
9093
9094 @noindent
9095 It starts with an @code{if} expression
9096
9097 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
9098 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
9099 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
9100 is testing has a function definition that `is not void'. If the
9101 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
9102 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
9103 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
9104
9105 @noindent
9106 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
9107 function @code{and}.
9108
9109 @findex and
9110 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
9111 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
9112 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
9113 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
9114 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
9115 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
9116 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
9117 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
9118
9119 The expression determines whether the second argument to
9120 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
9121 @ignore
9122 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
9123 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
9124 @end ignore
9125
9126 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
9127 possible to use the `Select and Paste' menu in the Edit item of a menu
9128 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
9129 have saved and select one piece to paste.
9130
9131 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
9132 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
9133 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
9134 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
9135 the string and stores it in memory operated by X. You can paste the
9136 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
9137
9138 @need 1200
9139 The expression looks like this:
9140
9141 @smallexample
9142 @group
9143 (if interprogram-cut-function
9144 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
9145 @end group
9146 @end smallexample
9147
9148 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
9149 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
9150 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
9151 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
9152 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
9153
9154 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
9155 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
9156 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
9157
9158 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
9159 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
9160 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
9161 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
9162 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
9163 clear such mysteries as the use of the term `pointer'. But before
9164 that, we will digress into C.
9165
9166 @ignore
9167 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
9168
9169 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
9170 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
9171 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
9172 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
9173
9174 If you then yank back the text, i.e., `paste' it, you get both
9175 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
9176 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
9177 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
9178 order is correct.)
9179
9180 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
9181 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
9182 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
9183 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
9184 @end ignore
9185 @ignore
9186
9187 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
9188 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
9189
9190 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
9191 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
9192
9193 2006 Oct 24
9194 In Emacs 22,
9195 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9196 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9197 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9198 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9199
9200 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9201 @end ignore
9202
9203 @node Digression into C, defvar, copy-region-as-kill, Cutting & Storing Text
9204 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9205 @section Digression into C
9206 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9207 @cindex C, a digression into
9208 @cindex Digression into C
9209
9210 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9211 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9212 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9213 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9214 back.
9215
9216 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9217 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9218 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9219 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9220 describe it here.
9221
9222 @c GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/src/editfns.c
9223 @c the DEFUN for buffer-substring-no-properties
9224
9225 @need 1500
9226 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9227 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9228 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9229 like this:
9230
9231 @smallexample
9232 @group
9233 DEFUN ("buffer-substring-no-properties", Fbuffer_substring_no_properties,
9234 Sbuffer_substring_no_properties, 2, 2, 0,
9235 doc: /* Return the characters of part of the buffer,
9236 without the text properties.
9237 The two arguments START and END are character positions;
9238 they can be in either order. */)
9239 (start, end)
9240 Lisp_Object start, end;
9241 @{
9242 register int b, e;
9243
9244 validate_region (&start, &end);
9245 b = XINT (start);
9246 e = XINT (end);
9247
9248 return make_buffer_string (b, e, 0);
9249 @}
9250 @end group
9251 @end smallexample
9252
9253 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9254 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9255 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9256 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9257 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9258
9259 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9260 parentheses:
9261
9262 @itemize @bullet
9263 @item
9264 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9265 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9266
9267 @item
9268 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9269 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9270 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9271 instead.
9272
9273 @item
9274 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9275 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9276 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9277
9278 @item
9279 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9280 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9281 arguments.
9282
9283 @item
9284 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9285 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9286 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9287 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9288 (which is a `null string'), as in this macro.
9289
9290 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9291 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9292 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9293 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9294 and provides a prompt.
9295
9296 @item
9297 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9298 function written in Emacs Lisp, except that every newline must be
9299 written explicitly as @samp{\n} followed by a backslash and carriage
9300 return.
9301
9302 @need 1000
9303 Thus, the first two lines of documentation for @code{goto-char} are
9304 written like this:
9305
9306 @smallexample
9307 @group
9308 "Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.\n\
9309 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max)."
9310 @end group
9311 @end smallexample
9312 @end itemize
9313
9314 @need 1200
9315 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9316 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the `body'
9317 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the `body'
9318 consists of the following four lines:
9319
9320 @smallexample
9321 @group
9322 validate_region (&start, &end);
9323 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9324 return build_string ("");
9325 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9326 @end group
9327 @end smallexample
9328
9329 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9330 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9331 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9332 then return and empty string.
9333
9334 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9335 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9336 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9337 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9338 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9339
9340 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9341 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9342 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9343 to understand, the two integers are of type `Lisp_Object', which can
9344 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9345
9346 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9347 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9348 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9349 information; the remaining bits are used as `content'.
9350
9351 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9352 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9353
9354 @need 800
9355 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9356
9357 @smallexample
9358 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9359 @end smallexample
9360
9361 @noindent
9362 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9363 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9364
9365 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9366 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9367 all work.
9368
9369 @node defvar, cons & search-fwd Review, Digression into C, Cutting & Storing Text
9370 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9371 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9372 @findex defvar
9373 @cindex Initializing a variable
9374 @cindex Variable initialization
9375
9376 @ignore
9377 2006 Oct 24
9378 In Emacs 22,
9379 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9380 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9381 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9382 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9383
9384 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9385
9386 @end ignore
9387
9388 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9389 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9390 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9391 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9392 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9393 form.
9394
9395 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9396 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9397 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9398
9399 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9400 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9401 name comes from ``define variable''.
9402
9403 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9404 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9405 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9406 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9407 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9408 documentation string.
9409
9410 (Another special form, @code{defcustom}, is designed for variables
9411 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9412 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9413
9414 @menu
9415 * See variable current value::
9416 * defvar and asterisk::
9417 @end menu
9418
9419 @node See variable current value, defvar and asterisk, defvar, defvar
9420 @ifnottex
9421 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9422 @end ifnottex
9423
9424 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9425 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9426 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9427 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9428 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9429 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9430 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9431 @code{kill-ring}:
9432
9433 @smallexample
9434 @group
9435 Documentation:
9436 List of killed text sequences.
9437 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9438 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9439 @end group
9440 @group
9441 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9442 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9443 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9444 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9445 ring directly.
9446 @end group
9447 @end smallexample
9448
9449 @need 800
9450 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9451
9452 @smallexample
9453 @group
9454 (defvar kill-ring nil
9455 "List of killed text sequences.
9456 @dots{}")
9457 @end group
9458 @end smallexample
9459
9460 @noindent
9461 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9462 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9463 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9464 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9465 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9466 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9467 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9468 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9469 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9470
9471 @node defvar and asterisk, , See variable current value, defvar
9472 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9473 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9474 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9475
9476 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9477 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9478 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9479 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9480 @code{defcustom} instead, since that special form provides a path into
9481 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9482 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9483
9484 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9485 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9486 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9487 documentation string. For example:
9488
9489 @smallexample
9490 @group
9491 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9492 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9493 @dots{} ")
9494 @end group
9495 @end smallexample
9496
9497 @findex set-variable
9498 @noindent
9499 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9500 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9501 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9502 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9503 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9504 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9505 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9506 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9507
9508 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9509 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9510 are now more than 700 such variables --- far too many to remember
9511 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9512 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9513 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9514 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9515
9516 @need 1250
9517 @node cons & search-fwd Review, search Exercises, defvar, Cutting & Storing Text
9518 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9519 @section Review
9520
9521 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9522
9523 @table @code
9524 @item car
9525 @itemx cdr
9526 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9527 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9528
9529 @need 1250
9530 For example:
9531
9532 @smallexample
9533 @group
9534 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9535 @result{} 1
9536 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9537 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9538 @end group
9539 @end smallexample
9540
9541 @item cons
9542 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9543 second argument.
9544
9545 @need 1250
9546 For example:
9547
9548 @smallexample
9549 @group
9550 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9551 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9552 @end group
9553 @end smallexample
9554
9555 @item funcall
9556 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9557 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9558
9559 @item nthcdr
9560 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} `n' times on a list.
9561 @iftex
9562 The
9563 @tex
9564 $n^{th}$
9565 @end tex
9566 @code{cdr}.
9567 @end iftex
9568 The `rest of the rest', as it were.
9569
9570 @need 1250
9571 For example:
9572
9573 @smallexample
9574 @group
9575 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9576 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9577 @end group
9578 @end smallexample
9579
9580 @item setcar
9581 @itemx setcdr
9582 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9583 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9584
9585 @need 1250
9586 For example:
9587
9588 @smallexample
9589 @group
9590 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9591
9592 (setcar triple '37)
9593
9594 triple
9595 @result{} (37 2 3)
9596
9597 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9598
9599 triple
9600 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9601 @end group
9602 @end smallexample
9603
9604 @item progn
9605 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9606 last.
9607
9608 @need 1250
9609 For example:
9610
9611 @smallexample
9612 @group
9613 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9614 @result{} 4
9615 @end group
9616 @end smallexample
9617
9618 @item save-restriction
9619 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9620 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9621
9622 @item search-forward
9623 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9624 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9625 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9626 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9627
9628 @need 1250
9629 @noindent
9630 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9631 arguments:
9632
9633 @enumerate
9634 @item
9635 The string or regular expression to search for.
9636
9637 @item
9638 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9639
9640 @item
9641 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9642 error message.
9643
9644 @item
9645 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9646 search goes backwards.
9647 @end enumerate
9648
9649 @item kill-region
9650 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9651 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9652
9653 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9654 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9655 by yanking.
9656
9657 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9658 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9659 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9660 @end table
9661
9662 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9663 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9664 (This is not an interactive command.)
9665
9666 @need 1500
9667 @node search Exercises, , cons & search-fwd Review, Cutting & Storing Text
9668 @section Searching Exercises
9669
9670 @itemize @bullet
9671 @item
9672 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9673 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9674 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9675 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9676 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9677 @code{test-search} instead.)
9678
9679 @item
9680 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9681 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9682 print an appropriate message.
9683 @end itemize
9684
9685 @node List Implementation, Yanking, Cutting & Storing Text, Top
9686 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
9687 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9688 @cindex Lists in a computer
9689
9690 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9691 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9692 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9693 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9694 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9695 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9696 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9697 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9698 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9699 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9700
9701 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9702 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9703
9704 @menu
9705 * Lists diagrammed::
9706 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9707 * List Exercise::
9708 @end menu
9709
9710 @node Lists diagrammed, Symbols as Chest, List Implementation, List Implementation
9711 @ifnottex
9712 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9713 @end ifnottex
9714
9715 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9716 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9717 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9718 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9719 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9720 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9721 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9722
9723 @need 1200
9724 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9725
9726 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9727 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9728 @ifnottex
9729 @smallexample
9730 @group
9731 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9732 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9733 | | |
9734 | | |
9735 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9736 @end group
9737 @end smallexample
9738 @end ifnottex
9739 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9740 @sp 1
9741 @tex
9742 @center @image{cons-1}
9743 %%%% old method of including an image
9744 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9745 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-1.eps}}
9746 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9747 @end tex
9748 @sp 1
9749 @end ifset
9750 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9751 @iftex
9752 @smallexample
9753 @group
9754 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9755 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9756 | | |
9757 | | |
9758 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9759 @end group
9760 @end smallexample
9761 @end iftex
9762 @end ifclear
9763
9764 @noindent
9765 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9766 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9767 i.e.@: the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9768 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9769 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9770 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9771 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9772 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9773 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9774
9775 @need 1200
9776 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9777 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9778 evaluation of the expression
9779
9780 @smallexample
9781 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9782 @end smallexample
9783
9784 @need 1250
9785 @noindent
9786 creates a situation like this:
9787
9788 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9789 @ifnottex
9790 @smallexample
9791 @group
9792 bouquet
9793 |
9794 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9795 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9796 | | |
9797 | | |
9798 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9799 @end group
9800 @end smallexample
9801 @end ifnottex
9802 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9803 @sp 1
9804 @tex
9805 @center @image{cons-2}
9806 %%%% old method of including an image
9807 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9808 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2.eps}}
9809 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9810 @end tex
9811 @sp 1
9812 @end ifset
9813 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9814 @iftex
9815 @smallexample
9816 @group
9817 bouquet
9818 |
9819 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9820 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9821 | | |
9822 | | |
9823 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9824 @end group
9825 @end smallexample
9826 @end iftex
9827 @end ifclear
9828
9829 @noindent
9830 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9831 pair of boxes.
9832
9833 @need 1200
9834 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9835 like this:
9836
9837 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9838 @ifnottex
9839 @smallexample
9840 @group
9841 bouquet
9842 |
9843 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9844 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9845 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9846 | | | | | | | cup | |
9847 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9848 @end group
9849 @end smallexample
9850 @end ifnottex
9851 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9852 @sp 1
9853 @tex
9854 @center @image{cons-2a}
9855 %%%% old method of including an image
9856 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9857 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-2a.eps}}
9858 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9859 @end tex
9860 @sp 1
9861 @end ifset
9862 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9863 @iftex
9864 @smallexample
9865 @group
9866 bouquet
9867 |
9868 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9869 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9870 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9871 | | | | | | | cup | |
9872 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9873 @end group
9874 @end smallexample
9875 @end iftex
9876 @end ifclear
9877
9878 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9879 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9880 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9881 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9882 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9883 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9884 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9885 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9886 address-boxes for the list.)
9887
9888 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9889 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9890 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are `non-destructive'.) Thus,
9891 evaluation of the following expression
9892
9893 @smallexample
9894 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9895 @end smallexample
9896
9897 @need 800
9898 @noindent
9899 produces this:
9900
9901 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9902 @ifnottex
9903 @sp 1
9904 @smallexample
9905 @group
9906 bouquet flowers
9907 | |
9908 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9909 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9910 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9911 | | |
9912 | | |
9913 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9914 @end group
9915 @end smallexample
9916 @sp 1
9917 @end ifnottex
9918 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9919 @sp 1
9920 @tex
9921 @center @image{cons-3}
9922 %%%% old method of including an image
9923 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9924 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-3.eps}}
9925 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9926 @end tex
9927 @sp 1
9928 @end ifset
9929 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9930 @iftex
9931 @sp 1
9932 @smallexample
9933 @group
9934 bouquet flowers
9935 | |
9936 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9937 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9938 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9939 | | |
9940 | | |
9941 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9942 @end group
9943 @end smallexample
9944 @sp 1
9945 @end iftex
9946 @end ifclear
9947
9948 @noindent
9949 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9950 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9951 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9952 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9953
9954 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9955 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9956 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9957 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9958 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9959
9960 @need 1200
9961 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9962 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9963 the expression
9964
9965 @smallexample
9966 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9967 @end smallexample
9968
9969 @need 1500
9970 @noindent
9971 produces:
9972
9973 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9974 @ifnottex
9975 @sp 1
9976 @smallexample
9977 @group
9978 bouquet flowers
9979 | |
9980 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9981 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9982 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9983 | | | |
9984 | | | |
9985 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9986 @end group
9987 @end smallexample
9988 @sp 1
9989 @end ifnottex
9990 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9991 @sp 1
9992 @tex
9993 @center @image{cons-4}
9994 %%%% old method of including an image
9995 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
9996 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-4.eps}}
9997 % \catcode`\@=0 %
9998 @end tex
9999 @sp 1
10000 @end ifset
10001 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10002 @iftex
10003 @sp 1
10004 @smallexample
10005 @group
10006 bouquet flowers
10007 | |
10008 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10009 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
10010 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
10011 | | | |
10012 | | | |
10013 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
10014 @end group
10015 @end smallexample
10016 @sp 1
10017 @end iftex
10018 @end ifclear
10019
10020 @need 1200
10021 @noindent
10022 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
10023 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
10024
10025 @smallexample
10026 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
10027 @end smallexample
10028
10029 @noindent
10030 which returns @code{t} for true.
10031
10032 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
10033 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
10034 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
10035 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
10036
10037 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
10038 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
10039 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
10040 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
10041 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
10042 brilliantly simple!
10043
10044 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
10045 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
10046
10047 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
10048 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
10049
10050 @node Symbols as Chest, List Exercise, Lists diagrammed, List Implementation
10051 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10052 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
10053 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
10054 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
10055
10056 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
10057 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
10058 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
10059 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
10060 drawer holding the function definition, and vice-verse.
10061
10062 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
10063 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
10064 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
10065 where the buried treasure lies.
10066
10067 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
10068 symbol has a `drawer' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
10069 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
10070 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
10071 Reference Manual}.)
10072
10073 @need 1500
10074 Here is a fanciful representation:
10075
10076 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
10077 @ifnottex
10078 @sp 1
10079 @smallexample
10080 @group
10081 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10082
10083 __ o0O0o __
10084 / \
10085 ---------------------
10086 | directions to | [map to]
10087 | symbol name | bouquet
10088 | |
10089 +---------------------+
10090 | directions to |
10091 | symbol definition | [none]
10092 | |
10093 +---------------------+
10094 | directions to | [map to]
10095 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10096 | |
10097 +---------------------+
10098 | directions to |
10099 | property list | [not described here]
10100 | |
10101 +---------------------+
10102 |/ \|
10103 @end group
10104 @end smallexample
10105 @sp 1
10106 @end ifnottex
10107 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10108 @sp 1
10109 @tex
10110 @center @image{drawers}
10111 %%%% old method of including an image
10112 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10113 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/drawers.eps}}
10114 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10115 @end tex
10116 @sp 1
10117 @end ifset
10118 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10119 @iftex
10120 @sp 1
10121 @smallexample
10122 @group
10123 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
10124
10125 __ o0O0o __
10126 / \
10127 ---------------------
10128 | directions to | [map to]
10129 | symbol name | bouquet
10130 | |
10131 +---------------------+
10132 | directions to |
10133 | symbol definition | [none]
10134 | |
10135 +---------------------+
10136 | directions to | [map to]
10137 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
10138 | |
10139 +---------------------+
10140 | directions to |
10141 | property list | [not described here]
10142 | |
10143 +---------------------+
10144 |/ \|
10145 @end group
10146 @end smallexample
10147 @sp 1
10148 @end iftex
10149 @end ifclear
10150
10151 @node List Exercise, , Symbols as Chest, List Implementation
10152 @section Exercise
10153
10154 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
10155 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
10156 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
10157 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
10158
10159 @node Yanking, Loops & Recursion, List Implementation, Top
10160 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10161 @chapter Yanking Text Back
10162 @findex yank
10163 @cindex Text retrieval
10164 @cindex Retrieving text
10165 @cindex Pasting text
10166
10167 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a `kill' command in GNU Emacs,
10168 you can bring it back with a `yank' command. The text that is cut out of
10169 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
10170 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
10171 the original buffer).
10172
10173 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
10174 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
10175 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
10176 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
10177 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
10178 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
10179 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
10180 `ring' rather than just a `list'. However, the actual data structure
10181 that holds the text is a list.
10182 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
10183 list is handled as a ring.)
10184
10185 @menu
10186 * Kill Ring Overview::
10187 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
10188 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10189 @end menu
10190
10191 @node Kill Ring Overview, kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking, Yanking
10192 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10193 @section Kill Ring Overview
10194 @cindex Kill ring overview
10195
10196 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
10197
10198 @smallexample
10199 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10200 @end smallexample
10201
10202 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
10203 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
10204 buffer where my cursor is located.
10205
10206 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
10207 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
10208 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
10209
10210 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
10211 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
10212 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
10213 which is used by the two other functions.
10214
10215 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
10216 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
10217 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
10218
10219 @smallexample
10220 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10221 @end smallexample
10222
10223 @noindent
10224 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
10225 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
10226 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
10227 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
10228 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
10229 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
10230 is easier to understand.)
10231
10232 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
10233 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
10234
10235 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer, yank nthcdr Exercises, Kill Ring Overview, Yanking
10236 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10237 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
10238
10239 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
10240 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
10241 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
10242
10243 @need 1000
10244 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
10245
10246 @smallexample
10247 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10248 @end smallexample
10249
10250 @need 1250
10251 @noindent
10252 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10253 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10254
10255 @smallexample
10256 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10257 @end smallexample
10258
10259 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10260 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10261 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10262 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10263 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10264 text. Here is a diagram:
10265
10266 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10267 @ifnottex
10268 @smallexample
10269 @group
10270 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10271 | |
10272 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10273 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10274 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10275 | | |
10276 | | |
10277 | | --> "yet more text"
10278 | |
10279 | --> "a different piece of text"
10280 |
10281 --> "some text"
10282 @end group
10283 @end smallexample
10284 @sp 1
10285 @end ifnottex
10286 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10287 @sp 1
10288 @tex
10289 @center @image{cons-5}
10290 %%%% old method of including an image
10291 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
10292 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/cons-5.eps}}
10293 % \catcode`\@=0 %
10294 @end tex
10295 @sp 1
10296 @end ifset
10297 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10298 @iftex
10299 @smallexample
10300 @group
10301 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10302 | |
10303 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10304 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10305 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10306 | | |
10307 | | |
10308 | | --> "yet more text"
10309 | |
10310 | --> "a different piece of text
10311 |
10312 --> "some text"
10313 @end group
10314 @end smallexample
10315 @sp 1
10316 @end iftex
10317 @end ifclear
10318
10319 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10320 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10321 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10322 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10323 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10324 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10325
10326 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10327 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10328 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10329 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10330 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to `point to'---that part
10331 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10332 inserted.
10333
10334 @ignore
10335 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10336
10337 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10338
10339 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10340 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10341 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10342 (interactive "p")
10343 (current-kill arg))
10344
10345 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10346 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10347 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10348 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10349 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10350 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10351 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10352 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10353 interprogram-paste-function
10354 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10355 (if interprogram-paste
10356 (progn
10357 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10358 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10359 ;; selection, with identical text.
10360 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10361 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10362 interprogram-paste)
10363 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10364 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10365 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10366 (length kill-ring))
10367 kill-ring)))
10368 (or do-not-move
10369 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10370 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10371
10372 @end ignore
10373
10374 @need 1500
10375 @node yank nthcdr Exercises, , kill-ring-yank-pointer, Yanking
10376 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10377
10378 @itemize @bullet
10379 @item
10380 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10381 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10382 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10383 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10384 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10385 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10386
10387 @item
10388 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10389 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10390 @end itemize
10391
10392 @node Loops & Recursion, Regexp Search, Yanking, Top
10393 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10394 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10395 @cindex Loops and recursion
10396 @cindex Recursion and loops
10397 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10398
10399 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10400 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10401 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10402
10403 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10404 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10405 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10406 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10407 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10408 have on humans.
10409
10410 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10411 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10412 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10413 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10414 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10415 frugal of `mental resources'---sometimes use considerable computer
10416 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10417 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10418 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10419 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10420 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10421
10422 @menu
10423 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10424 * dolist dotimes::
10425 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10426 * Looping exercise::
10427 @end menu
10428
10429 @node while, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion, Loops & Recursion
10430 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10431 @section @code{while}
10432 @cindex Loops
10433 @findex while
10434
10435 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10436 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10437 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10438 next, however, is different.
10439
10440 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10441 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10442 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10443 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10444 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10445 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10446 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10447 body of the expression.
10448
10449 @need 1200
10450 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10451
10452 @smallexample
10453 @group
10454 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10455 @var{body}@dots{})
10456 @end group
10457 @end smallexample
10458
10459 @menu
10460 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10461 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10462 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10463 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10464 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10465 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10466 @end menu
10467
10468 @node Looping with while, Loop Example, while, while
10469 @ifnottex
10470 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10471 @end ifnottex
10472
10473 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10474 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10475 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10476 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10477 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10478 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10479 expression and `exits the loop'.
10480
10481 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10482 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10483 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10484 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10485 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10486 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10487 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10488 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10489
10490 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10491 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10492 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10493 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10494 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10495 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10496 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10497 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10498 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10499 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10500 are repeatedly evaluated.
10501
10502 @node Loop Example, print-elements-of-list, Looping with while, while
10503 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10504 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10505
10506 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10507 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10508 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10509 create a short example to illustrate it.
10510
10511 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10512 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10513 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10514 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10515 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10516 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10517 @code{while} loop.
10518
10519 @need 1200
10520 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10521 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10522
10523 @smallexample
10524 (setq empty-list ())
10525 @end smallexample
10526
10527 @noindent
10528 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10529 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10530 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10531 echo area:
10532
10533 @smallexample
10534 empty-list
10535 @end smallexample
10536
10537 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10538 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10539 evaluating the following two expressions:
10540
10541 @smallexample
10542 @group
10543 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10544
10545 animals
10546 @end group
10547 @end smallexample
10548
10549 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10550 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10551 written like this:
10552
10553 @smallexample
10554 @group
10555 (while animals
10556 @dots{}
10557 @end group
10558 @end smallexample
10559
10560 @noindent
10561 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10562 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10563 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10564 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10565 to be false.
10566
10567 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10568 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10569 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10570 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10571 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10572 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10573 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10574 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10575
10576 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10577 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10578 following expression:
10579
10580 @smallexample
10581 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10582 @end smallexample
10583
10584 @noindent
10585 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10586 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10587 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10588 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10589 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10590
10591 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10592 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10593 looks like this:
10594
10595 @smallexample
10596 @group
10597 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10598 @var{body}@dots{}
10599 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10600 @end group
10601 @end smallexample
10602
10603 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10604 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10605 own.
10606
10607 @node print-elements-of-list, Incrementing Loop, Loop Example, while
10608 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10609 @findex print-elements-of-list
10610
10611 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10612 loop with a list.
10613
10614 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10615 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10616 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10617 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10618 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10619
10620 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10621 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10622 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10623 earlier versions.
10624
10625 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10626 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10627 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10628 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10629 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10630 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10631 (@code{yank}).
10632
10633 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10634 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10635 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10636 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10637 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10638 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10639 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10640 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10641 each @samp{^J} stands for a `newline'.)
10642
10643 @need 1500
10644 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10645 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10646 results.
10647
10648 @smallexample
10649 @group
10650 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10651
10652 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10653 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10654 (while list
10655 (print (car list))
10656 (setq list (cdr list))))
10657
10658 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10659 @end group
10660 @end smallexample
10661
10662 @need 1200
10663 @noindent
10664 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10665 this:
10666
10667 @smallexample
10668 @group
10669 gazelle
10670
10671 giraffe
10672
10673 lion
10674
10675 tiger
10676 nil
10677 @end group
10678 @end smallexample
10679
10680 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10681 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10682 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10683 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10684 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10685
10686 @node Incrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop Details, print-elements-of-list, while
10687 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
10688 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10689
10690 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10691 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10692 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10693 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10694 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10695 repeats itself.
10696
10697 @node Incrementing Loop Details, Decrementing Loop, Incrementing Loop, while
10698 @ifnottex
10699 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10700 @end ifnottex
10701
10702 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10703 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10704 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10705 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10706 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10707 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10708 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10709 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10710 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10711 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10712
10713 @need 1250
10714 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10715 counter looks like this:
10716
10717 @smallexample
10718 @group
10719 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10720 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10721 @var{body}@dots{}
10722 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10723 @end group
10724 @end smallexample
10725
10726 @noindent
10727 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10728 is set to 1.
10729
10730 @menu
10731 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10732 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10733 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10734 @end menu
10735
10736 @node Incrementing Example, Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details, Incrementing Loop Details
10737 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10738
10739 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10740 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10741 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10742
10743 @sp 1
10744 @c pebble diagram
10745 @ifnottex
10746 @smallexample
10747 @group
10748 *
10749 * *
10750 * * *
10751 * * * *
10752 @end group
10753 @end smallexample
10754 @end ifnottex
10755 @iftex
10756 @smallexample
10757 @group
10758 @bullet{}
10759 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10760 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10761 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10762 @end group
10763 @end smallexample
10764 @end iftex
10765 @sp 1
10766
10767 @noindent
10768 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10769 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10770
10771 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10772 triangle with 7 rows?
10773
10774 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10775 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10776 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10777 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10778 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10779 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10780 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10781
10782 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10783 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10784 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10785 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10786 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10787 a more complex process once.
10788
10789 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10790 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10791 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10792 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10793 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10794
10795 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10796 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10797 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10798 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10799 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10800 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10801 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10802
10803 @node Inc Example parts, Inc Example altogether, Incrementing Example, Incrementing Loop Details
10804 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10805
10806 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10807 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10808 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10809 the function.
10810
10811 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10812 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10813 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10814
10815 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10816 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10817 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10818 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10819
10820 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10821 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10822 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10823 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10824 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10825 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10826 more rows left to add.
10827
10828 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10829 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10830 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10831 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10832 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10833 statement will look like this:
10834
10835 @smallexample
10836 @group
10837 (let ((total 0)
10838 (row-number 1))
10839 @var{body}@dots{})
10840 @end group
10841 @end smallexample
10842
10843 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10844 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10845 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10846 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10847 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10848 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10849 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10850 equal to the number of rows.)
10851
10852 @need 1500
10853 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10854 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10855 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10856 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10857 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10858
10859 @smallexample
10860 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10861 @end smallexample
10862
10863 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10864 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10865 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10866 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10867 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10868 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10869 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10870
10871 @smallexample
10872 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10873 @end smallexample
10874
10875 @noindent
10876 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10877 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10878
10879 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10880 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10881 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10882 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10883 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10884 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10885 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10886 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10887 repetition of the loop.
10888
10889 @need 1200
10890 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10891 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10892
10893 @smallexample
10894 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10895 @end smallexample
10896
10897 @node Inc Example altogether, , Inc Example parts, Incrementing Loop Details
10898 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10899
10900 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10901 put them together.
10902
10903 @need 800
10904 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10905
10906 @smallexample
10907 @group
10908 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10909 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10910 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10911 @end group
10912 @end smallexample
10913
10914 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10915 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10916 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10917
10918 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10919 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10920 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10921 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10922 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10923
10924 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10925 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10926 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10927 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10928 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10929 of the @code{let}.
10930
10931 @need 1250
10932 In outline, the function will look like this:
10933
10934 @smallexample
10935 @group
10936 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10937 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10938 (let (@var{varlist})
10939 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10940 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10941 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10942 @end group
10943 @end smallexample
10944
10945 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10946 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10947 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10948 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10949 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10950 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10951 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10952 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10953 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10954 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10955
10956 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10957 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10958 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10959 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10960 the last element:
10961
10962 @smallexample
10963 @group
10964 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10965 @end group
10966 @end smallexample
10967
10968 @need 1200
10969 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10970 looks like this:
10971
10972 @smallexample
10973 @group
10974 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10975 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10976 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10977 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10978 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10979 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10980 @end group
10981 @group
10982 (let ((total 0)
10983 (row-number 1))
10984 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10985 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10986 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10987 total))
10988 @end group
10989 @end smallexample
10990
10991 @need 1200
10992 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10993 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10994
10995 @smallexample
10996 @group
10997 (triangle 4)
10998
10999 (triangle 7)
11000 @end group
11001 @end smallexample
11002
11003 @noindent
11004 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
11005 numbers is 28.
11006
11007 @node Decrementing Loop, , Incrementing Loop Details, while
11008 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11009 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
11010
11011 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
11012 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
11013 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
11014 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
11015 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
11016 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
11017 repeatedly.
11018
11019 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
11020 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
11021 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
11022 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
11023 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
11024 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
11025 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
11026
11027 @need 1250
11028 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
11029
11030 @smallexample
11031 @group
11032 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
11033 @var{body}@dots{}
11034 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
11035 @end group
11036 @end smallexample
11037
11038 @menu
11039 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
11040 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
11041 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
11042 @end menu
11043
11044 @node Decrementing Example, Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop, Decrementing Loop
11045 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
11046
11047 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
11048 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
11049
11050 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
11051 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
11052 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
11053 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
11054 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
11055
11056 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
11057 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
11058 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
11059 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
11060 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
11061 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
11062 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
11063 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
11064
11065 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
11066 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
11067 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
11068 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
11069 the row.
11070
11071 @node Dec Example parts, Dec Example altogether, Decrementing Example, Decrementing Loop
11072 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
11073
11074 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
11075 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
11076 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
11077 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
11078 @code{total}, respectively.
11079
11080 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
11081 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
11082 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
11083 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
11084 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
11085 the longest row.
11086
11087 @need 1250
11088 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
11089 like this:
11090
11091 @smallexample
11092 @group
11093 (let ((total 0)
11094 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11095 @var{body}@dots{})
11096 @end group
11097 @end smallexample
11098
11099 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
11100 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
11101 evaluating the following expression:
11102
11103 @smallexample
11104 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11105 @end smallexample
11106
11107 @noindent
11108 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
11109 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
11110 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
11111 added to the total.
11112
11113 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
11114 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
11115 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
11116 done with the following expression:
11117
11118 @smallexample
11119 @group
11120 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11121 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11122 @end group
11123 @end smallexample
11124
11125 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
11126 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
11127 the @code{while} loop is simply:
11128
11129 @smallexample
11130 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11131 @end smallexample
11132
11133 @node Dec Example altogether, , Dec Example parts, Decrementing Loop
11134 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
11135
11136 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
11137 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
11138 variables is unneeded!
11139
11140 @need 1250
11141 The function definition looks like this:
11142
11143 @smallexample
11144 @group
11145 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
11146 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
11147 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11148 (let ((total 0)
11149 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
11150 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
11151 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
11152 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
11153 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
11154 total))
11155 @end group
11156 @end smallexample
11157
11158 As written, this function works.
11159
11160 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
11161
11162 @cindex Argument as local variable
11163 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
11164 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
11165 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
11166 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
11167 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
11168 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
11169 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
11170 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
11171
11172 @need 800
11173 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
11174
11175 @smallexample
11176 @group
11177 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
11178 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
11179 (let ((total 0))
11180 (while (> number 0)
11181 (setq total (+ total number))
11182 (setq number (1- number)))
11183 total))
11184 @end group
11185 @end smallexample
11186
11187 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
11188
11189 @enumerate
11190 @item
11191 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
11192 correct number of times.
11193
11194 @item
11195 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
11196 after being repeatedly evaluated.
11197
11198 @item
11199 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
11200 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
11201 number of times.
11202 @end enumerate
11203
11204 @node dolist dotimes, Recursion, while, Loops & Recursion
11205 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11206 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11207
11208 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
11209 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
11210 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
11211 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
11212
11213 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that `@sc{cdr}s down a
11214 list': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
11215 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
11216 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
11217
11218 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
11219
11220 @menu
11221 * dolist::
11222 * dotimes::
11223 @end menu
11224
11225 @node dolist, dotimes, dolist dotimes, dolist dotimes
11226 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
11227 @findex dolist
11228
11229 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
11230 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
11231
11232 @need 1250
11233 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
11234
11235 @smallexample
11236 @group
11237 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11238
11239 (reverse animals)
11240 @end group
11241 @end smallexample
11242
11243 @need 800
11244 @noindent
11245 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
11246
11247 @smallexample
11248 @group
11249 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11250
11251 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
11252 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
11253 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11254 (while list
11255 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
11256 (setq list (cdr list)))
11257 value))
11258
11259 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
11260 @end group
11261 @end smallexample
11262
11263 @need 800
11264 @noindent
11265 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11266
11267 @smallexample
11268 @group
11269 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11270
11271 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11272 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11273 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11274 (dolist (element list value)
11275 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11276
11277 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11278 @end group
11279 @end smallexample
11280
11281 @need 1250
11282 @noindent
11283 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11284 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11285
11286 @smallexample
11287 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11288 @end smallexample
11289
11290 @noindent
11291 in the echo area.
11292
11293 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11294 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11295 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11296 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11297 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11298 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11299 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11300 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11301
11302 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11303 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11304 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11305 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11306 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11307 the loop.
11308
11309 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11310 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11311 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11312
11313 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11314 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops --- it
11315 `@sc{cdr}s down the list' on its own --- and it automatically binds
11316 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11317 arguments.
11318
11319 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11320 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11321 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11322 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11323
11324 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11325 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11326 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11327 @code{value}.
11328
11329 @node dotimes, , dolist, dolist dotimes
11330 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11331 @findex dotimes
11332
11333 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11334 loops a specific number of times.
11335
11336 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11337 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11338 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11339 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11340
11341 @need 1250
11342 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11343 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11344 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11345 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11346 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11347
11348 @smallexample
11349 @group
11350 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11351 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11352 (setq value (cons number value))))
11353
11354 @result{} (2 1 0)
11355 @end group
11356 @end smallexample
11357
11358 @noindent
11359 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11360 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11361 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11362
11363 @need 1250
11364 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11365 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11366
11367 @smallexample
11368 @group
11369 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11370 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11371 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11372 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11373 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11374
11375 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11376 @end group
11377 @end smallexample
11378
11379 @node Recursion, Looping exercise, dolist dotimes, Loops & Recursion
11380 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11381 @section Recursion
11382 @cindex Recursion
11383
11384 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11385 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11386 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11387 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11388 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11389 different `instance'.
11390
11391 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the `slightly
11392 different arguments' will become sufficiently different from the first
11393 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11394
11395 @menu
11396 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11397 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11398 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11399 * Recursive triangle function::
11400 * Recursion with cond::
11401 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11402 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11403 * No deferment solution::
11404 @end menu
11405
11406 @node Building Robots, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion, Recursion
11407 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11408 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11409 @cindex Building robots
11410 @cindex Robots, building
11411
11412 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11413 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11414 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11415 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11416 passed different arguments than the first.
11417
11418 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11419 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11420 entity; but all are clones.
11421
11422 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11423 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11424 when to stop.
11425
11426 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11427
11428 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11429 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11430 @code{defun} special form, you install the necessary equipment to
11431 build robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an
11432 assembly line. Robots with the same name are built according to the
11433 same blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same `model number',
11434 but a different `serial number'.
11435
11436 We often say that a recursive function `calls itself'. What we mean
11437 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11438 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11439 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11440
11441 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11442 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11443
11444 @node Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion with list, Building Robots, Recursion
11445 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11446 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11447 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11448 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11449
11450 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11451 has three parts:
11452
11453 @enumerate
11454 @item
11455 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11456 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11457
11458 @item
11459 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11460 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11461
11462 @item
11463 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11464 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11465 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11466 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11467 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11468 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11469 @end enumerate
11470
11471 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11472 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11473 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11474 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11475 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11476
11477 @need 1200
11478 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11479 pattern looks like this:
11480
11481 @smallexample
11482 @group
11483 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11484 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11485 (if @var{do-again-test}
11486 @var{body}@dots{}
11487 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11488 @var{next-step-expression})))
11489 @end group
11490 @end smallexample
11491
11492 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11493 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11494
11495 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11496 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11497
11498 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11499
11500 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11501 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11502 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11503 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11504 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11505
11506 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11507 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11508
11509 @node Recursion with list, Recursive triangle function, Recursive Definition Parts, Recursion
11510 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11511 @subsection Recursion with a List
11512
11513 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11514 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11515 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11516
11517 If you are reading this in Info in Emacs, you can evaluate this
11518 expression directly in Info. Otherwise, you must copy the example
11519 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate each expression there.
11520 Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11521 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11522 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11523 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11524
11525 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11526 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11527 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11528
11529 @findex print-elements-recursively
11530 @smallexample
11531 @group
11532 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11533
11534 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11535 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11536 Uses recursion."
11537 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11538 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11539 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11540 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11541
11542 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11543 @end group
11544 @end smallexample
11545
11546 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11547 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11548 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11549 function `invokes itself', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11550 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11551 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11552
11553 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11554 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11555 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11556 instance.
11557
11558 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11559 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11560 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11561
11562 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11563 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11564 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11565 list). Then the function `calls itself' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11566 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11567 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11568
11569 Note that although we say that the function `calls itself', what we
11570 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11571 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11572 but is a separate individual.
11573
11574 Each time the function `invokes itself', it invokes itself on a
11575 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11576 works on a shorter list.
11577
11578 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11579 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11580 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11581 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11582 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11583
11584 @need 1200
11585 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11586 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11587
11588 @smallexample
11589 @group
11590 gazelle
11591
11592 giraffe
11593
11594 lion
11595
11596 tiger
11597 nil
11598 @end group
11599 @end smallexample
11600
11601 @need 2000
11602 @node Recursive triangle function, Recursion with cond, Recursion with list, Recursion
11603 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11604 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11605 @findex triangle-recursively
11606
11607 @need 1200
11608 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11609 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11610
11611 @smallexample
11612 @group
11613 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11614 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11615 Uses recursion."
11616 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11617 1 ; @r{then-part}
11618 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11619 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11620 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11621
11622 (triangle-recursively 7)
11623 @end group
11624 @end smallexample
11625
11626 @noindent
11627 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11628 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11629 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11630 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11631
11632 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11633 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11634 its argument.
11635
11636 @menu
11637 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11638 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11639 @end menu
11640
11641 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, Recursive triangle function, Recursive triangle function
11642 @ifnottex
11643 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11644 @end ifnottex
11645
11646 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11647
11648 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11649 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11650 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11651 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11652 one row has one pebble in it.)
11653
11654 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11655 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11656
11657 @need 1200
11658 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11659 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11660 this:
11661
11662 @smallexample
11663 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11664 @end smallexample
11665
11666 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11667 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11668 in detail:
11669
11670 @table @i
11671 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11672
11673 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11674 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11675
11676 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11677
11678 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11679 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11680 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11681 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11682 function
11683
11684 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11685 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11686 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11687
11688 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11689
11690 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11691 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11692
11693 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11694
11695 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11696 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11697 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11698
11699 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11700 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11701 pebbles in it.
11702 @end table
11703
11704 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4, , Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2, Recursive triangle function
11705 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11706
11707 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11708 3.
11709
11710 @table @i
11711 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11712
11713 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11714 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11715 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11716 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11717 true.)
11718
11719 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11720
11721 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11722 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11723
11724 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11725
11726 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11727
11728 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11729 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11730 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11731
11732 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11733
11734 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11735 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11736 @end table
11737
11738 @noindent
11739 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11740
11741 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11742 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11743 called with an argument of 4:
11744
11745 @quotation
11746 @need 800
11747 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11748
11749 @smallexample
11750 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11751 @end smallexample
11752
11753 @need 800
11754 @noindent
11755 will return the value of evaluating
11756
11757 @smallexample
11758 (triangle-recursively 3)
11759 @end smallexample
11760
11761 @noindent
11762 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11763 third line.
11764 @end quotation
11765
11766 @noindent
11767 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11768
11769 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11770 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11771 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11772 evaluate itself.
11773
11774 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11775 requires that operations be deferred.
11776
11777 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11778 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11779 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11780 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11781 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11782 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11783 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11784 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11785
11786 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11787 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11788 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11789 on.
11790
11791 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11792 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11793
11794 @node Recursion with cond, Recursive Patterns, Recursive triangle function, Recursion
11795 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11796 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11797 @findex cond
11798
11799 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11800 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11801 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11802 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11803
11804 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11805 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11806 explaining it.
11807
11808 @need 800
11809 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11810
11811 @smallexample
11812 @group
11813 (cond
11814 @var{body}@dots{})
11815 @end group
11816 @end smallexample
11817
11818 @noindent
11819 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11820
11821 @need 800
11822 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11823
11824 @smallexample
11825 @group
11826 (cond
11827 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11828 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11829 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11830 @dots{})
11831 @end group
11832 @end smallexample
11833
11834 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11835 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11836 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11837 @code{cond}.
11838
11839 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11840 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11841 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11842 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11843 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11844 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11845 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11846 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11847 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11848
11849 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11850 returns @code{nil}.
11851
11852 @need 1250
11853 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11854
11855 @smallexample
11856 @group
11857 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11858 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11859 ((= number 1) 1)
11860 ((> number 1)
11861 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11862 @end group
11863 @end smallexample
11864
11865 @noindent
11866 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11867 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11868 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11869 1.
11870
11871 @node Recursive Patterns, No Deferment, Recursion with cond, Recursion
11872 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11873 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11874 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11875
11876 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11877 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11878 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11879
11880 @menu
11881 * Every::
11882 * Accumulate::
11883 * Keep::
11884 @end menu
11885
11886 @node Every, Accumulate, Recursive Patterns, Recursive Patterns
11887 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11888 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11889 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11890 @cindex Recursive pattern: every
11891
11892 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11893 element of a list.
11894
11895 @need 1500
11896 The basic pattern is:
11897
11898 @itemize @bullet
11899 @item
11900 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11901 @item
11902 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11903 @itemize @minus
11904 @item
11905 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11906 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11907 @item
11908 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11909 with the results of acting on the rest.
11910 @end itemize
11911 @end itemize
11912
11913 @need 1500
11914 Here is example:
11915
11916 @smallexample
11917 @group
11918 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11919 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11920 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11921 nil
11922 (cons
11923 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11924 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11925 @end group
11926
11927 @group
11928 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11929 @result{} (1 4 9)
11930 @end group
11931 @end smallexample
11932
11933 @need 1200
11934 @noindent
11935 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11936 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11937 with the result of the recursive call.
11938
11939 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11940 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11941 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11942 empty.)
11943
11944 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11945 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11946 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11947 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11948
11949 @need 1250
11950 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11951
11952 @smallexample
11953 @group
11954 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11955 @end group
11956
11957 @group
11958 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11959 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11960 Uses recursion."
11961 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11962 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11963 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11964 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11965
11966 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11967 @end group
11968 @end smallexample
11969
11970 @need 1500
11971 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11972
11973 @itemize @bullet
11974 @item
11975 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11976 @item
11977 But when the list has at least one element,
11978 @itemize @minus
11979 @item
11980 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11981 @item
11982 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11983 @end itemize
11984 @end itemize
11985
11986 @node Accumulate, Keep, Every, Recursive Patterns
11987 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
11988 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11989 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11990 @cindex Recursive pattern: accumulate
11991
11992 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11993 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11994 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11995 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11996
11997 This is very like the `every' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11998 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11999
12000 @need 1500
12001 The pattern is:
12002
12003 @itemize @bullet
12004 @item
12005 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
12006 @item
12007 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
12008 @itemize @minus
12009 @item
12010 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
12011 some other combining function, with
12012 @item
12013 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12014 @end itemize
12015 @end itemize
12016
12017 @need 1500
12018 Here is an example:
12019
12020 @smallexample
12021 @group
12022 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
12023 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
12024 (if (not numbers-list)
12025 0
12026 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
12027 @end group
12028
12029 @group
12030 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
12031 @result{} 10
12032 @end group
12033 @end smallexample
12034
12035 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
12036 accumulate pattern.
12037
12038 @node Keep, , Accumulate, Recursive Patterns
12039 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12040 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
12041 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
12042 @cindex Recursive pattern: keep
12043
12044 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
12045 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
12046 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
12047 meets a criterion.
12048
12049 Again, this is very like the `every' pattern, except the element is
12050 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
12051
12052 @need 1500
12053 The pattern has three parts:
12054
12055 @itemize @bullet
12056 @item
12057 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
12058 @item
12059 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
12060 a test
12061 @itemize @minus
12062 @item
12063 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
12064 @item
12065 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12066 @end itemize
12067 @item
12068 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
12069 the test
12070 @itemize @minus
12071 @item
12072 skip on that element,
12073 @item
12074 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
12075 @end itemize
12076 @end itemize
12077
12078 @need 1500
12079 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
12080
12081 @smallexample
12082 @group
12083 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
12084 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
12085 (cond
12086 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
12087 ((not word-list) nil)
12088
12089 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
12090 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
12091 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
12092 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
12093
12094 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
12095 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
12096 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
12097 @end group
12098
12099 @group
12100 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
12101 @result{} (one two six)
12102 @end group
12103 @end smallexample
12104
12105 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
12106 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
12107
12108 @node No Deferment, No deferment solution, Recursive Patterns, Recursion
12109 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
12110 @cindex Deferment in recursion
12111 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
12112
12113 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
12114 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
12115 deferred until all can be done.
12116
12117 @need 800
12118 Here is the function definition:
12119
12120 @smallexample
12121 @group
12122 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
12123 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12124 Uses recursion."
12125 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
12126 1 ; @r{then-part}
12127 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
12128 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
12129 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
12130 @end group
12131 @end smallexample
12132
12133 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
12134
12135 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
12136 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
12137 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
12138 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
12139
12140 @smallexample
12141 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
12142 @end smallexample
12143
12144 @noindent
12145 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
12146 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
12147 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
12148 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
12149 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
12150 `different instantiation'. Or, put another way, it is a different
12151 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
12152 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
12153
12154 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
12155 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
12156 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
12157 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
12158
12159 @need 800
12160 Now the total is:
12161
12162 @smallexample
12163 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
12164 @end smallexample
12165
12166 @need 800
12167 And what happens next?
12168
12169 @smallexample
12170 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
12171 @end smallexample
12172
12173 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
12174 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
12175 asks it to make a calculation.
12176
12177 @need 800
12178 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
12179
12180 @smallexample
12181 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
12182 @end smallexample
12183
12184 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
12185 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
12186 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
12187 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
12188 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
12189 more steps.
12190
12191 @node No deferment solution, , No Deferment, Recursion
12192 @subsection No Deferment Solution
12193 @cindex No deferment solution
12194 @cindex Defermentless solution
12195 @cindex Solution without deferment
12196
12197 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
12198 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
12199 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
12200 `constant space'.}. This requires
12201 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
12202 function definitions, an `initialization' function and a `helper'
12203 function.
12204
12205 The `initialization' function sets up the job; the `helper' function
12206 does the work.
12207
12208 @need 1200
12209 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
12210 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
12211
12212 @smallexample
12213 @group
12214 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
12215 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
12216 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
12217 duo that uses recursion."
12218 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
12219 @end group
12220 @end smallexample
12221
12222 @smallexample
12223 @group
12224 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
12225 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
12226 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
12227 that uses recursion."
12228 (if (> counter number)
12229 sum
12230 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
12231 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
12232 number))) ; @r{number}
12233 @end group
12234 @end smallexample
12235
12236 @need 1250
12237 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
12238 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
12239
12240 @smallexample
12241 @group
12242 (triangle-initialization 2)
12243 @result{} 3
12244 @end group
12245 @end smallexample
12246
12247 The `initialization' function calls the first instance of the `helper'
12248 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
12249 number of rows in the triangle.
12250
12251 The first two arguments passed to the `helper' function are
12252 initialization values. These values are changed when
12253 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
12254 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
12255 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
12256 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
12257 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
12258 procedure is recursive because the function `calls itself'. On the
12259 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
12260 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
12261 `recursive' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
12262
12263 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
12264 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
12265
12266 @need 1200
12267 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
12268 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
12269 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
12270
12271 @smallexample
12272 (> 0 1)
12273 @end smallexample
12274
12275 @need 1200
12276 @noindent
12277 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12278 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12279
12280 @smallexample
12281 @group
12282 (triangle-recursive-helper
12283 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12284 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12285 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12286 @end group
12287 @end smallexample
12288
12289 @need 800
12290 @noindent
12291 which will first compute:
12292
12293 @smallexample
12294 @group
12295 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12296 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12297 1) ; @r{number}
12298 @exdent which is:
12299
12300 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12301 @end group
12302 @end smallexample
12303
12304 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12305 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12306 new instance with new arguments.
12307
12308 @need 800
12309 This new instance will be;
12310
12311 @smallexample
12312 @group
12313 (triangle-recursive-helper
12314 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12315 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12316 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12317
12318 @exdent which is:
12319
12320 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12321 @end group
12322 @end smallexample
12323
12324 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12325 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12326 expected.
12327
12328 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12329 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12330
12331 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12332
12333 @need 800
12334 In stages, the instances called will be:
12335
12336 @smallexample
12337 @group
12338 @r{sum counter number}
12339 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12340
12341 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12342
12343 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12344 @end group
12345 @end smallexample
12346
12347 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12348 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12349 which will be 3.
12350
12351 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12352 many resources in a computer.
12353
12354 @need 1500
12355 @node Looping exercise, , Recursion, Loops & Recursion
12356 @section Looping Exercise
12357
12358 @itemize @bullet
12359 @item
12360 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12361 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12362
12363 @item
12364 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12365 adds the values.
12366
12367 @item
12368 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12369 using @code{cond}.
12370
12371 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12372 @item
12373 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12374 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12375 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12376 written in Texinfo.)
12377
12378 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12379 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12380 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12381 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12382 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12383 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12384 backwards.
12385
12386 For more information, see
12387 @ifinfo
12388 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12389 @end ifinfo
12390 @ifhtml
12391 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12392 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12393 Internet, see
12394 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12395 @end ifhtml
12396 @iftex
12397 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.'' in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12398 Documentation Format}.
12399 @end iftex
12400 @end itemize
12401
12402 @node Regexp Search, Counting Words, Loops & Recursion, Top
12403 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12404 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12405 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12406 @cindex Regular expression searches
12407 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12408 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12409 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12410 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12411
12412 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12413 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12414 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12415 where to move point. The phrase `regular expression' is often written
12416 as `regexp'.
12417
12418 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12419 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12420 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12421 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12422 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12423 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12424 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12425 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12426 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12427 that spot.
12428
12429 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12430 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12431 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12432 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12433 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12434 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12435 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12436 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12437 introduces several new features.
12438
12439 @menu
12440 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12441 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12442 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12443 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12444 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12445 * Regexp Review::
12446 * re-search Exercises::
12447 @end menu
12448
12449 @node sentence-end, re-search-forward, Regexp Search, Regexp Search
12450 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12451 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12452 @findex sentence-end
12453
12454 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12455 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12456
12457 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12458 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12459 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12460 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12461
12462 @smallexample
12463 [.?!]
12464 @end smallexample
12465
12466 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12467 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12468 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12469 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12470
12471 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12472 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12473 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12474 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12475 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12476 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12477 items as alternatives.
12478
12479 @need 800
12480 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12481
12482 @smallexample
12483 @group
12484 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12485 ^ ^^
12486 TAB SPC
12487 @end group
12488 @end smallexample
12489
12490 @noindent
12491 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12492 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12493 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12494
12495 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12496 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12497 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12498 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12499
12500 @need 1000
12501 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12502 this:
12503
12504 @smallexample
12505 @group
12506 [
12507 ]*
12508 @end group
12509 @end smallexample
12510
12511 @noindent
12512 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12513 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12514 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12515
12516 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12517 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12518 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12519 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12520 expression that looks like this:
12521
12522 @smallexample
12523 []\"')@}]*
12524 @end smallexample
12525
12526 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12527 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12528 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12529 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12530
12531 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12532 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12533 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12534
12535 @smallexample
12536 @group
12537 sentence-end
12538 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12539 ]*"
12540 @end group
12541 @end smallexample
12542
12543 @noindent
12544 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12545 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12546 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12547 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12548 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12549 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12550 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12551 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12552 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12553 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12554 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12555 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12556 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12557
12558 @ignore
12559 @noindent
12560 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12561 literally in the pattern.)
12562
12563 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12564
12565 @table @code
12566 @item [.?!]
12567 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12568 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12569 begin with one or other of these characters.
12570
12571 @item []\"')@}]*
12572 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12573 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12574 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12575 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12576 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12577 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12578 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12579 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12580 more times.
12581
12582 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12583 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12584 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12585 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12586 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12587 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12588 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12589 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12590 indicate what they are.
12591
12592 @item [@key{RET}]*
12593 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12594 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12595 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12596 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12597 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12598 @end table
12599 @end ignore
12600
12601 @node re-search-forward, forward-sentence, sentence-end, Regexp Search
12602 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12603 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12604 @findex re-search-forward
12605
12606 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12607 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12608 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12609
12610 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12611 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12612 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12613 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12614 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12615 is therefore a `side effect'.)
12616
12617 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12618 four arguments:
12619
12620 @enumerate
12621 @item
12622 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12623 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12624
12625 @item
12626 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12627 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12628
12629 @item
12630 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12631 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12632 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12633 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12634 if the search succeeds.
12635
12636 @item
12637 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12638 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12639 @end enumerate
12640
12641 @need 800
12642 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12643
12644 @smallexample
12645 @group
12646 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12647 @var{limit-of-search}
12648 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12649 @var{repeat-count})
12650 @end group
12651 @end smallexample
12652
12653 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12654 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12655 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12656 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12657 to.
12658
12659 @need 1200
12660 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12661 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12662
12663 @smallexample
12664 @group
12665 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12666 ]*"
12667 @end group
12668 @end smallexample
12669
12670 @noindent
12671 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12672 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12673 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12674 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12675
12676 @node forward-sentence, forward-paragraph, re-search-forward, Regexp Search
12677 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12678 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12679 @findex forward-sentence
12680
12681 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12682 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12683 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12684 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12685 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12686 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12687
12688 @menu
12689 * Complete forward-sentence::
12690 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12691 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12692 @end menu
12693
12694 @node Complete forward-sentence, fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12695 @ifnottex
12696 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12697 @end ifnottex
12698
12699 @need 1250
12700 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12701
12702 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12703 @smallexample
12704 @group
12705 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12706 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12707 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12708
12709 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12710 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12711 @end group
12712 @group
12713 (interactive "p")
12714 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12715 (let ((opoint (point))
12716 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12717 (while (< arg 0)
12718 (let ((pos (point))
12719 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12720 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12721 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12722 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12723 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12724 (goto-char par-beg)))
12725 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12726 @end group
12727 @group
12728 (while (> arg 0)
12729 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12730 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12731 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12732 (goto-char par-end)))
12733 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12734 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12735 @end group
12736 @end smallexample
12737
12738 @ignore
12739 GNU Emacs 21
12740 @smallexample
12741 @group
12742 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12743 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12744 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12745 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12746 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12747 terminates sentences as well."
12748 @end group
12749 @group
12750 (interactive "p")
12751 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12752 (while (< arg 0)
12753 (let ((par-beg
12754 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12755 (if (re-search-backward
12756 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12757 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12758 (goto-char par-beg)))
12759 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12760 (while (> arg 0)
12761 (let ((par-end
12762 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12763 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12764 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12765 (goto-char par-end)))
12766 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12767 @end group
12768 @end smallexample
12769 @end ignore
12770
12771 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12772 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12773 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12774
12775 @smallexample
12776 @group
12777 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12778 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12779 (interactive "p")
12780 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12781 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12782 (while (< arg 0)
12783 (let ((pos (point))
12784 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12785 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12786 (while (> arg 0)
12787 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12788 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12789 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12790 @end group
12791 @end smallexample
12792
12793 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12794 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12795 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12796
12797 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12798
12799 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12800
12801 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12802 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12803 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12804 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12805 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12806
12807 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12808 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12809 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12810 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12811 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12812 @code{nil}.
12813
12814 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12815 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12816 point, from before the search, is used in the
12817 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12818 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12819 @code{sentence-end} function.
12820
12821 @node fwd-sentence while loops, fwd-sentence re-search, Complete forward-sentence, forward-sentence
12822 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12823
12824 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12825 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12826 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12827 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12828 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12829 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12830 loop.
12831
12832 @need 1500
12833 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12834 looks like this:
12835
12836 @smallexample
12837 @group
12838 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12839 (let @var{varlist}
12840 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12841 @var{then-part}
12842 @var{else-part}
12843 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12844 @end group
12845 @end smallexample
12846
12847 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12848 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12849 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12850 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12851 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12852 the loop repeats.
12853
12854 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12855 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12856 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12857
12858 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12859 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12860 @code{if} expression.
12861
12862 @need 1250
12863 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12864
12865 @smallexample
12866 @group
12867 (let ((par-end
12868 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12869 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12870 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12871 (goto-char par-end)))
12872 @end group
12873 @end smallexample
12874
12875 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12876 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12877 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12878 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12879 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12880
12881 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12882 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12883 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12884 evaluates the expression
12885
12886 @smallexample
12887 @group
12888 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12889 @end group
12890 @end smallexample
12891
12892 @noindent
12893 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12894 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12895 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12896 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12897 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12898 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12899 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12900
12901 @need 1200
12902 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12903 expression that looks like this:
12904
12905 @smallexample
12906 @group
12907 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12908 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12909 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12910 @end group
12911 @end smallexample
12912
12913 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12914 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12915 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12916 expression is the regular expression search.
12917
12918 It may seem odd to have what looks like the `real work' of
12919 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12920 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12921
12922 @node fwd-sentence re-search, , fwd-sentence while loops, forward-sentence
12923 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12924
12925 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12926 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12927 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12928 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12929
12930 @enumerate
12931 @item
12932 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12933 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12934
12935 @item
12936 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12937 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12938 successful.
12939 @end enumerate
12940
12941 @noindent
12942 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12943 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12944 conclusion of the search.
12945
12946 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12947 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12948 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12949 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12950 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12951 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12952 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12953 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12954 usually a period.
12955
12956 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12957 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12958 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12959 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12960 end of the paragraph.
12961
12962 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12963 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12964
12965 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12966 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12967 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12968 incorporating this pattern often.
12969
12970 @node forward-paragraph, etags, forward-sentence, Regexp Search
12971 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
12972 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12973 @findex forward-paragraph
12974
12975 @ignore
12976 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12977 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12978 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12979 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12980 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12981
12982 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12983 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12984 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12985 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12986 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12987 (interactive "p")
12988 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12989 (let* ((opoint (point))
12990 (fill-prefix-regexp
12991 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12992 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12993 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12994 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12995 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12996 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12997 ;; work normally with indented text.
12998 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12999 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
13000 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
13001 (substring paragraph-start 1)
13002 paragraph-start))
13003 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
13004 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
13005 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
13006 paragraph-separate))
13007 (parsep
13008 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13009 (concat parsep "\\|"
13010 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
13011 parsep))
13012 ;; This is used for searching.
13013 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
13014 start found-start)
13015 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
13016 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
13017 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
13018 (looking-at parsep))
13019 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13020 (setq start (point))
13021 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
13022 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
13023 (while (and (not (bobp))
13024 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13025 (looking-at parsep)))
13026 (forward-line -1))
13027 (if (bobp)
13028 nil
13029 (setq arg (1+ arg))
13030 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
13031 (end-of-line)
13032 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
13033 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
13034 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13035 (let (multiple-lines)
13036 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
13037 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13038 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13039 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13040 (unless (= (point) start)
13041 (setq multiple-lines t))
13042 (forward-line -1))
13043 (move-to-left-margin)
13044 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
13045 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
13046 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
13047 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
13048 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
13049 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13050 ;; multiple-lines
13051 ;; (forward-line 1))
13052 (not (bobp)))
13053 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
13054 (setq found-start t)
13055 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
13056 ;; REAL parstart.
13057 (progn (setq start (point))
13058 (move-to-left-margin)
13059 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13060 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
13061 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
13062 (bobp)
13063 (get-text-property
13064 (1- start) 'hard)))))
13065 (setq found-start nil)
13066 (goto-char start))
13067 found-start)
13068 ;; Found one.
13069 (progn
13070 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
13071 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
13072 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
13073 (while (and (not (eobp))
13074 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13075 (looking-at parsep)))
13076 (forward-line 1))
13077 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
13078 (end-of-line 0)
13079 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
13080 (forward-char 1)
13081 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
13082 (if (not (bolp))
13083 (forward-line 1))))
13084 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
13085 (goto-char (point-min))))))
13086
13087 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13088 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13089 (while (and (not (eobp))
13090 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13091 (looking-at parsep))
13092 (forward-line 1))
13093 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13094 ;; ... and one more line.
13095 (forward-line 1)
13096 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13097 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13098 (while (and (not (eobp))
13099 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13100 (not (looking-at parsep))
13101 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13102 (forward-line 1))
13103 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13104 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13105 (goto-char start)
13106 (not (eobp)))
13107 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13108 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13109 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13110 (and use-hard-newlines
13111 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13112 (forward-char 1))
13113 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13114 (goto-char start))))
13115 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
13116 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
13117 arg))
13118 @end ignore
13119
13120 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
13121 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
13122 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
13123 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
13124
13125 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
13126 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
13127 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
13128 fill prefix.
13129
13130 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
13131 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
13132 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
13133 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
13134 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
13135 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
13136 prefixes.)
13137
13138 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
13139 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
13140 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
13141 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
13142 with the fill prefix.
13143
13144 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
13145 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
13146 This is an added complication.
13147
13148 @menu
13149 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
13150 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
13151 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
13152 @end menu
13153
13154 @node forward-paragraph in brief, fwd-para let, forward-paragraph, forward-paragraph
13155 @ifnottex
13156 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
13157 @end ifnottex
13158
13159 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
13160 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
13161 can be daunting!
13162
13163 @need 800
13164 In outline, the function looks like this:
13165
13166 @smallexample
13167 @group
13168 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
13169 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13170 (interactive "p")
13171 (or arg (setq arg 1))
13172 (let*
13173 @var{varlist}
13174 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
13175 @dots{}
13176 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
13177 @dots{}
13178 @end group
13179 @end smallexample
13180
13181 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
13182 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
13183
13184 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
13185 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
13186 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
13187 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
13188 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
13189 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
13190 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
13191 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
13192 familiar part of this function.
13193
13194 @node fwd-para let, fwd-para while, forward-paragraph in brief, forward-paragraph
13195 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
13196
13197 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
13198 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
13199 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
13200
13201 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
13202 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
13203 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
13204 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
13205
13206 @ignore
13207 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
13208 @end ignore
13209
13210 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
13211
13212 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
13213 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13214 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
13215 @code{found-start}.
13216
13217 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
13218 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
13219
13220 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
13221 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
13222 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
13223
13224 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
13225 evaluating the following list:
13226
13227 @smallexample
13228 @group
13229 (and fill-prefix
13230 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
13231 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13232 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
13233 @end group
13234 @end smallexample
13235
13236 @noindent
13237 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
13238
13239 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
13240 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
13241 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
13242 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
13243 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
13244 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
13245 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
13246 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
13247 arguments are true.
13248 @findex and
13249
13250 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
13251 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
13252 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
13253 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
13254
13255 @table @code
13256 @item fill-prefix
13257 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
13258 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
13259 @code{nil}.
13260
13261 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
13262 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
13263 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
13264 not a useful fill prefix.
13265
13266 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
13267 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
13268 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
13269 true value such as @code{t}.
13270
13271 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
13272 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
13273 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
13274 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
13275 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13276 @end table
13277
13278 @findex regexp-quote
13279 @noindent
13280 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13281 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13282 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13283 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13284 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13285 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13286 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13287 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13288
13289 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13290 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13291 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13292 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13293 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13294
13295 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13296 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13297 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13298 @code{nil} or some other value.
13299
13300 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13301 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13302 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13303 what separates paragraphs.)
13304
13305 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13306 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13307 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13308 of the pattern.
13309
13310 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13311 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13312 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13313 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13314 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13315 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13316
13317 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13318 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13319 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13320
13321 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13322 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13323 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13324 section.
13325
13326 @node fwd-para while, , fwd-para let, forward-paragraph
13327 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13328
13329 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13330 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13331 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13332 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13333 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13334 forward one paragraph.
13335
13336 @ignore
13337 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13338
13339 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13340 (while (and (not (eobp))
13341 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13342 (looking-at parsep))
13343 (forward-line 1))
13344 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13345 ;; ... and one more line.
13346 (forward-line 1)
13347
13348 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13349 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13350 (while (and (not (eobp))
13351 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13352 (not (looking-at parsep))
13353 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13354 (forward-line 1))
13355
13356 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13357 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13358 (goto-char start)
13359 (not (eobp)))
13360 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13361 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13362 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13363 (and use-hard-newlines
13364 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13365 (forward-char 1))
13366
13367 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13368 (goto-char start))))
13369 @end ignore
13370
13371 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13372 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13373
13374 @need 800
13375 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13376
13377 @smallexample
13378 @group
13379 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13380 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13381
13382 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13383 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13384 (while (and (not (eobp))
13385 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13386 (looking-at parsep))
13387 (forward-line 1))
13388 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13389 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13390 ;; ... and one more line.
13391 (forward-line 1)
13392 @end group
13393
13394 @group
13395 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13396 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13397 ;; we go forward line by line
13398 (while (and (not (eobp))
13399 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13400 (not (looking-at parsep))
13401 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13402 (forward-line 1))
13403 @end group
13404
13405 @group
13406 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13407 ;; we go forward character by character
13408 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13409 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13410 (goto-char start)
13411 (not (eobp)))
13412 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13413 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13414 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13415 (and use-hard-newlines
13416 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13417 (forward-char 1))
13418 @end group
13419
13420 @group
13421 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13422 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13423 ;; for sp-parstart
13424 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13425 (goto-char start))))
13426 @end group
13427 @end smallexample
13428
13429 @findex eobp
13430 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13431 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13432 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13433 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13434 of the buffer --- that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13435 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P} --- we decrease the value
13436 of @code{arg} by one.
13437
13438 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13439 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13440 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13441 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13442 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13443
13444 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13445 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13446 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13447
13448 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13449 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13450 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13451 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13452 margin of the current line.
13453
13454 @findex looking-at
13455 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13456 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13457 its argument.
13458
13459 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13460 sense as you come to understand it.
13461
13462 @need 800
13463 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13464
13465 @smallexample
13466 @group
13467 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13468 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13469 ;; we go forward line by line
13470 (while (and (not (eobp))
13471 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13472 (not (looking-at parsep))
13473 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13474 (forward-line 1))
13475 @end group
13476 @end smallexample
13477
13478 @noindent
13479 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13480 as four conditions are true:
13481
13482 @enumerate
13483 @item
13484 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13485
13486 @item
13487 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13488 not at the end of the buffer.
13489
13490 @item
13491 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13492
13493 @item
13494 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13495 @end enumerate
13496
13497 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13498 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13499 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13500 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13501
13502 @need 1250
13503 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13504
13505 @smallexample
13506 @group
13507 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13508 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13509 (goto-char start)
13510 (not (eobp)))
13511 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13512 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13513 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13514 (and use-hard-newlines
13515 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13516 (forward-char 1))
13517 @end group
13518 @end smallexample
13519
13520 @noindent
13521 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13522 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13523 with a the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13524 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13525 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13526 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13527
13528 @need 800
13529 The two expressions,
13530
13531 @smallexample
13532 @group
13533 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13534 (goto-char start)
13535 @end group
13536 @end smallexample
13537
13538 @noindent
13539 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13540 search.
13541
13542 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13543 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13544 the last search.
13545
13546 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13547 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13548 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13549 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13550 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13551 @code{sp-parstart}.
13552
13553 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13554 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13555 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13556 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13557
13558 @findex match-beginning
13559 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13560 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13561 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13562 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13563 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13564 of that pattern.
13565
13566 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13567 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13568 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13569 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13570 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13571
13572 @need 1250
13573 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13574
13575 @smallexample
13576 @group
13577 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13578 (goto-char start))))
13579 @end group
13580 @end smallexample
13581
13582 @noindent
13583 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13584 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13585 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13586
13587 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13588 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13589
13590 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13591 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13592 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13593 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13594 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13595 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13596 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13597 a car with his eyes shut!)
13598
13599 @node etags, Regexp Review, forward-paragraph, Regexp Search
13600 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13601 @findex etags
13602 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13603
13604 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13605 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13606 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13607 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13608 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13609 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13610
13611 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13612 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13613 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13614 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13615 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13616 sources.)
13617
13618 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13619 lack one.
13620
13621 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13622 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13623 the name is in upper case letters.
13624
13625 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13626 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13627 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13628 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13629
13630 @need 1250
13631 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13632 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13633 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13634 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13635 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13636
13637 @smallexample
13638 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13639 @end smallexample
13640
13641 @noindent
13642 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13643
13644 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13645 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13646 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13647 Lisp files in that directory.
13648
13649 @need 1250
13650 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell `wildcards'. For
13651 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13652 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13653 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13654
13655 @smallexample
13656 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13657 @end smallexample
13658
13659 @need 1250
13660 Type
13661
13662 @smallexample
13663 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13664 @end smallexample
13665
13666 @noindent
13667 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13668 list of supported languages.
13669
13670 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13671 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13672 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13673 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13674 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13675 file name and contents.
13676
13677 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13678 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13679 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13680 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13681
13682 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13683 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13684 program to attempt to find it.
13685
13686 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13687 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13688 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13689 `plain vanilla' system I recently installed did not contain any
13690 @file{TAGS} files.
13691
13692 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13693 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13694 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13695 visit-tags-table}.
13696
13697 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13698 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13699 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13700 @findex make tags
13701
13702 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13703 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13704 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13705 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13706 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13707
13708 @need 1250
13709 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13710 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13711
13712 @smallexample
13713 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13714 @end smallexample
13715
13716 @noindent
13717 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13718 as well as with some other source packages.)
13719
13720 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13721 Manual}.
13722
13723 @node Regexp Review, re-search Exercises, etags, Regexp Search
13724 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13725 @section Review
13726
13727 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13728
13729 @table @code
13730 @item while
13731 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13732 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13733 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13734
13735 @need 1250
13736 For example:
13737
13738 @smallexample
13739 @group
13740 (let ((foo 2))
13741 (while (> foo 0)
13742 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13743 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13744
13745 @result{} foo is 2.
13746 foo is 1.
13747 nil
13748 @end group
13749 @end smallexample
13750
13751 @noindent
13752 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13753 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13754 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13755 line.)
13756
13757 @item re-search-forward
13758 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13759 just after it.
13760
13761 @noindent
13762 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13763
13764 @enumerate
13765 @item
13766 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13767 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13768
13769 @item
13770 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13771
13772 @item
13773 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13774 error message.
13775
13776 @item
13777 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13778 search goes backwards.
13779 @end enumerate
13780
13781 @item let*
13782 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13783 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13784 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13785 variables bound earlier, if any.
13786
13787 @need 1250
13788 For example:
13789
13790 @smallexample
13791 @group
13792 (let* ((foo 7)
13793 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13794 (message "`bar' is %d." bar))
13795 @result{} `bar' is 21.
13796 @end group
13797 @end smallexample
13798
13799 @item match-beginning
13800 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13801 expression search.
13802
13803 @item looking-at
13804 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13805 which should be a regular expression.
13806
13807 @item eobp
13808 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13809 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13810 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13811 the buffer is narrowed.
13812 @end table
13813
13814 @need 1500
13815 @node re-search Exercises, , Regexp Review, Regexp Search
13816 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13817
13818 @itemize @bullet
13819 @item
13820 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13821 or more blank lines in sequence.
13822
13823 @item
13824 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as `the the'.
13825 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13826 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13827 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13828 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13829 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13830 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13831 @end itemize
13832
13833 @node Counting Words, Words in a defun, Regexp Search, Top
13834 @chapter Counting: Repetition and Regexps
13835 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13836 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13837
13838 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13839 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13840 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13841 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13842
13843 @menu
13844 * Why Count Words::
13845 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13846 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13847 * Counting Exercise::
13848 @end menu
13849
13850 @node Why Count Words, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words, Counting Words
13851 @ifnottex
13852 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13853 @end ifnottex
13854
13855 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13856 number of lines and words within a region.
13857
13858 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13859 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13860 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13861 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13862 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13863 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13864 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13865 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13866 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13867
13868 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13869 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13870 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13871
13872 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}, recursive-count-words, Why Count Words, Counting Words
13873 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
13874 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13875 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13876
13877 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13878 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13879 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13880 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13881 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13882 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13883 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13884 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13885 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13886
13887 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13888 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13889 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13890 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13891 or to a @code{while} loop.
13892
13893 @menu
13894 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13895 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13896 @end menu
13897
13898 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Whitespace Bug, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13899 @ifnottex
13900 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13901 @end ifnottex
13902
13903 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13904 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13905 interactive.
13906
13907 @need 800
13908 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13909
13910 @smallexample
13911 @group
13912 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13913 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13914 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13915 @var{body}@dots{})
13916 @end group
13917 @end smallexample
13918
13919 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13920
13921 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13922 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13923 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13924 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13925 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13926
13927 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13928 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13929 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13930 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13931 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13932 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13933 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13934 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13935 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13936 this is routine.
13937
13938 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13939 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13940 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13941 a message to the user.
13942
13943 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13944 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13945 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13946 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13947 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13948 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13949 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13950 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13951
13952 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13953 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13954 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13955 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13956 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13957
13958 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13959 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13960 `word' if we use a regular expression search.
13961
13962 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13963 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13964 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13965 word by word.
13966
13967 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13968 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13969 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13970 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13971 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13972 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13973 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13974 the regexp must be optional.)
13975
13976 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13977 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13978 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13979 this is:
13980
13981 @smallexample
13982 \w+\W*
13983 @end smallexample
13984
13985 @noindent
13986 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13987 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13988 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13989 Reference Manual}.
13990
13991 @need 800
13992 The search expression looks like this:
13993
13994 @smallexample
13995 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13996 @end smallexample
13997
13998 @noindent
13999 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
14000 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
14001 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
14002 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
14003 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
14004 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, `unspecial' backslash, so
14005 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
14006 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
14007
14008 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
14009 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
14010 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
14011
14012 @smallexample
14013 (setq count (1+ count))
14014 @end smallexample
14015
14016 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
14017 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
14018 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
14019 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
14020 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
14021 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
14022 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
14023 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
14024 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
14025 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
14026 special form is appropriate.
14027
14028 @need 1500
14029 All this leads to the following function definition:
14030
14031 @smallexample
14032 @group
14033 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14034 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14035 "Print number of words in the region.
14036 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14037 character followed by at least one character that
14038 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
14039 table determines which characters these are."
14040 (interactive "r")
14041 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14042 @end group
14043
14044 @group
14045 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14046 (save-excursion
14047 (goto-char beginning)
14048 (let ((count 0))
14049 @end group
14050
14051 @group
14052 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14053 (while (< (point) end)
14054 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14055 (setq count (1+ count)))
14056 @end group
14057
14058 @group
14059 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14060 (cond ((zerop count)
14061 (message
14062 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14063 ((= 1 count)
14064 (message
14065 "The region has 1 word."))
14066 (t
14067 (message
14068 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14069 @end group
14070 @end smallexample
14071
14072 @noindent
14073 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
14074
14075 @node Whitespace Bug, , Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}, @value{COUNT-WORDS}
14076 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14077 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14078
14079 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
14080 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
14081 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
14082 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
14083 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
14084 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
14085 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
14086 like this:
14087
14088 @smallexample
14089 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
14090 @end smallexample
14091
14092 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
14093 bugs yourself.
14094
14095 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
14096 @ifinfo
14097 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
14098 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
14099
14100 @smallexample
14101 @group
14102 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
14103 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14104 "Print number of words in the region.
14105 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
14106 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
14107 syntax table determines which characters these are."
14108 @end group
14109 @group
14110 (interactive "r")
14111 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14112 @end group
14113
14114 @group
14115 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14116 (save-excursion
14117 (goto-char beginning)
14118 (let ((count 0))
14119 @end group
14120
14121 @group
14122 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14123 (while (< (point) end)
14124 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
14125 (setq count (1+ count)))
14126 @end group
14127
14128 @group
14129 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14130 (cond ((zerop count)
14131 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
14132 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
14133 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
14134 @end group
14135 @end smallexample
14136 @end ifinfo
14137
14138 @need 1000
14139 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
14140
14141 @smallexample
14142 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
14143 @end smallexample
14144
14145 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
14146 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
14147 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
14148
14149 @smallexample
14150 one two three
14151 @end smallexample
14152
14153 @noindent
14154 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
14155
14156 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
14157 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
14158 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
14159 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
14160 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
14161 that the region has one word!
14162
14163 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
14164 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
14165 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
14166 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
14167 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
14168 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
14169 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
14170 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
14171
14172 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
14173
14174 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
14175 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
14176 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14177 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
14178 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
14179 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
14180 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
14181 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
14182 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
14183 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
14184 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
14185 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
14186 the marked region.
14187
14188 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
14189 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
14190 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
14191 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
14192 in the buffer, the search fails.
14193
14194 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
14195 extend outside of the region.
14196
14197 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
14198 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
14199 simple as you might think.
14200
14201 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
14202 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
14203 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
14204 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
14205 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
14206 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
14207 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
14208 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
14209
14210 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
14211 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
14212 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
14213 to the regular expression search expression:
14214
14215 @smallexample
14216 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
14217 @end smallexample
14218
14219 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14220 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
14221 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
14222 @samp{Search failed}.
14223
14224 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
14225 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14226 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
14227 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
14228 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
14229
14230 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
14231 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
14232 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
14233
14234 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
14235 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
14236 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
14237
14238 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
14239 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
14240 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
14241 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
14242 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
14243 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
14244 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
14245 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
14246 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
14247 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
14248 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
14249
14250 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
14251 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
14252 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
14253 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
14254 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
14255 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
14256
14257 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
14258 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
14259 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
14260 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
14261
14262 @smallexample
14263 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14264 @end smallexample
14265
14266 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
14267 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
14268 @iftex
14269 @noindent
14270 (For information about @code{and}, see
14271 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
14272 @end iftex
14273 @ifinfo
14274 @noindent
14275 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
14276 information about @code{and}.)
14277 @end ifinfo
14278
14279 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14280 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14281 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14282 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14283 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14284 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14285 other of its messages.
14286
14287 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14288 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14289 Here is what it looks like:
14290
14291 @smallexample
14292 @group
14293 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14294 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14295 "Print number of words in the region."
14296 (interactive "r")
14297 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14298 @end group
14299
14300 @group
14301 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14302 (save-excursion
14303 (let ((count 0))
14304 (goto-char beginning)
14305 @end group
14306
14307 @group
14308 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14309 (while (and (< (point) end)
14310 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14311 (setq count (1+ count)))
14312 @end group
14313
14314 @group
14315 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14316 (cond ((zerop count)
14317 (message
14318 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14319 ((= 1 count)
14320 (message
14321 "The region has 1 word."))
14322 (t
14323 (message
14324 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14325 @end group
14326 @end smallexample
14327
14328 @node recursive-count-words, Counting Exercise, @value{COUNT-WORDS}, Counting Words
14329 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
14330 @section Count Words Recursively
14331 @cindex Count words recursively
14332 @cindex Recursively counting words
14333 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14334
14335 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14336 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14337
14338 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14339 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14340 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14341 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14342
14343 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14344 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14345 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14346 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14347 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14348 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14349 message; the other will return the word count.
14350
14351 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14352 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14353
14354 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14355 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14356 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14357 determine how many words are in the region.
14358
14359 @need 1250
14360 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14361 previous versions:
14362
14363 @smallexample
14364 @group
14365 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14366 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14367 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14368 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14369 @end group
14370 @group
14371
14372 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14373 (@var{explanatory message})
14374 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14375 @end group
14376 @group
14377
14378 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14379 @var{recursive call}
14380 @end group
14381 @group
14382
14383 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14384 @var{message providing word count}))
14385 @end group
14386 @end smallexample
14387
14388 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14389 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14390 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14391 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14392 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14393 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14394 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14395 user.
14396
14397 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14398 somehow secondary to the `primary' work of a function. But in this
14399 case, what you might consider the `primary' job of the function,
14400 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14401
14402 @need 1250
14403 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14404
14405 @smallexample
14406 @group
14407 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14408 "Print number of words in the region."
14409 (interactive "r")
14410 @end group
14411
14412 @group
14413 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14414 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14415 (save-excursion
14416 (goto-char beginning)
14417 @end group
14418
14419 @group
14420 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14421 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14422 @end group
14423
14424 @group
14425 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14426 (cond ((zerop count)
14427 (message
14428 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14429 ((= 1 count)
14430 (message
14431 "The region has 1 word."))
14432 (t
14433 (message
14434 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14435 @end group
14436 @end smallexample
14437
14438 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14439
14440 A recursive function has at least three parts: the `do-again-test', the
14441 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call.
14442
14443 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14444 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14445 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14446 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14447 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14448 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14449 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14450 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14451 argument.
14452
14453 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14454 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14455
14456 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14457 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14458 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14459 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14460 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14461 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14462
14463 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14464
14465 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the `work' of the
14466 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14467
14468 @need 1250
14469 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14470
14471 @smallexample
14472 @group
14473 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14474 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14475 @var{do-again-test}
14476 @var{next-step-expression}
14477 @var{recursive call})
14478 @end group
14479 @end smallexample
14480
14481 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14482 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14483 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14484 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14485 function should return zero.
14486
14487 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14488 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14489
14490 @need 800
14491 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14492
14493 @smallexample
14494 @group
14495 (and (< (point) region-end)
14496 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14497 @end group
14498 @end smallexample
14499
14500 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14501 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14502 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14503 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14504 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14505
14506 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14507 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14508 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14509 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14510 search failed because there were no words to find.
14511
14512 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14513 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14514 part of the do-again-test.
14515
14516 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14517 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14518 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14519 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14520 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14521 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14522
14523 @need 1200
14524 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14525 function looks like this:
14526
14527 @smallexample
14528 @group
14529 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14530 ;; @r{then}
14531 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14532 ;; @r{else}
14533 @var{return-zero})
14534 @end group
14535 @end smallexample
14536
14537 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14538
14539 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14540 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14541 systematically.
14542
14543 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14544 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14545 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14546 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14547 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14548
14549 @need 800
14550 Consider several cases:
14551
14552 @itemize @bullet
14553 @item
14554 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14555 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14556 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14557 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14558
14559 @item
14560 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14561 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14562 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14563 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14564
14565 @item
14566 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14567 @end itemize
14568
14569 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14570 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14571 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14572 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14573
14574 @need 1200
14575 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14576 adds one to its argument.
14577
14578 @smallexample
14579 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14580 @end smallexample
14581
14582 @need 1200
14583 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14584 this:
14585
14586 @smallexample
14587 @group
14588 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14589 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14590
14591 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14592 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14593 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14594 @end group
14595
14596 @group
14597 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14598 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14599
14600 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14601 0))
14602 @end group
14603 @end smallexample
14604
14605 @need 1250
14606 Let's examine how this works:
14607
14608 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14609 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14610
14611 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14612 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14613 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14614 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14615 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14616 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14617 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14618
14619 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14620 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14621 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14622 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14623 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14624 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14625 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14626 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14627
14628 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14629 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14630 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14631 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14632 the correct amount.
14633
14634 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14635 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14636 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14637 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14638
14639 @need 1250
14640 @noindent
14641 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14642
14643 @need 1250
14644 @noindent
14645 The recursive function:
14646
14647 @findex recursive-count-words
14648 @smallexample
14649 @group
14650 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14651 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14652 @end group
14653
14654 @group
14655 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14656 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14657 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14658 @end group
14659
14660 @group
14661 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14662 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14663
14664 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14665 0))
14666 @end group
14667 @end smallexample
14668
14669 @need 800
14670 @noindent
14671 The wrapper:
14672
14673 @smallexample
14674 @group
14675 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14676 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14677 "Print number of words in the region.
14678 @end group
14679
14680 @group
14681 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14682 character followed by at least one character that is
14683 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14684 determines which characters these are."
14685 @end group
14686 @group
14687 (interactive "r")
14688 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14689 (save-excursion
14690 (goto-char beginning)
14691 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14692 @end group
14693 @group
14694 (cond ((zerop count)
14695 (message
14696 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14697 @end group
14698 @group
14699 ((= 1 count)
14700 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14701 (t
14702 (message
14703 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14704 @end group
14705 @end smallexample
14706
14707 @node Counting Exercise, , recursive-count-words, Counting Words
14708 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14709
14710 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14711 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14712 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14713
14714 @node Words in a defun, Readying a Graph, Counting Words, Top
14715 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14716 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14717 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14718
14719 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14720 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14721 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting Words:
14722 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14723 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14724 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14725 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14726
14727 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14728 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14729 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14730 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14731 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14732 and this will tell.
14733
14734 @menu
14735 * Divide and Conquer::
14736 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14737 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14738 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14739 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14740 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14741 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14742 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14743 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14744 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14745 @end menu
14746
14747 @node Divide and Conquer, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun, Words in a defun
14748 @ifnottex
14749 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14750 @end ifnottex
14751
14752 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14753 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14754 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14755 steps must be:
14756
14757 @itemize @bullet
14758 @item
14759 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14760 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14761
14762 @item
14763 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14764 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14765 function.
14766
14767 @item
14768 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14769 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14770 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14771 definitions within them.
14772
14773 @item
14774 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14775 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14776 a graph.
14777
14778 @item
14779 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14780 @end itemize
14781
14782 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14783 be difficult.
14784
14785 @node Words and Symbols, Syntax, Divide and Conquer, Words in a defun
14786 @section What to Count?
14787 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14788
14789 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14790 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14791 we going to count? When we speak of `words' with respect to a Lisp
14792 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14793 `symbols'. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14794 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14795 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14796 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14797 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14798 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14799 of ten words and symbols.
14800
14801 @smallexample
14802 @group
14803 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14804 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14805 (* 7 number))
14806 @end group
14807 @end smallexample
14808
14809 @noindent
14810 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14811 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14812 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14813 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14814 ten! Something is wrong!
14815
14816 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14817 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14818 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14819 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14820 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14821 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14822
14823 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14824 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14825 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14826 regexp is:
14827
14828 @smallexample
14829 "\\w+\\W*"
14830 @end smallexample
14831
14832 @noindent
14833 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14834 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14835 that are not word constituents. What is meant by `word constituent
14836 characters' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14837 of its own.
14838
14839 @node Syntax, count-words-in-defun, Words and Symbols, Words in a defun
14840 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14841 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14842
14843 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14844 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14845 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14846 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14847 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14848 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14849 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14850 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14851 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14852
14853 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14854 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a `word constituent character'.
14855 Instead, it is specified as being in the `class of characters that are
14856 part of symbol names but not words.' This means that the
14857 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14858 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14859 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14860
14861 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14862 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14863
14864 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14865 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14866 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14867 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14868 constituent character; there are others, too.
14869
14870 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14871 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14872 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14873
14874 @need 1200
14875 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14876 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14877
14878 @smallexample
14879 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14880 @end smallexample
14881
14882 @noindent
14883 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14884 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14885 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14886 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14887 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14888 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14889 characters must be matched at least once.
14890
14891 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14892 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14893 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14894 I thought I could define this with the following:
14895
14896 @smallexample
14897 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14898 @end smallexample
14899
14900 @noindent
14901 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14902 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14903 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14904 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14905
14906 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14907 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14908 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14909 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14910 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14911 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14912 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14913 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14914 then followed optionally by white space.
14915
14916 @need 800
14917 Here is the full regular expression:
14918
14919 @smallexample
14920 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14921 @end smallexample
14922
14923 @node count-words-in-defun, Several defuns, Syntax, Words in a defun
14924 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14925 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14926
14927 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14928 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14929 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14930 versions.
14931
14932 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14933 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14934 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14935 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14936 simplify the definition a little.
14937
14938 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14939 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14940 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14941 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14942 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14943 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14944 function.
14945
14946 @need 1250
14947 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14948
14949 @smallexample
14950 @group
14951 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14952 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14953 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14954 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14955 @var{return count})
14956 @end group
14957 @end smallexample
14958
14959 @noindent
14960 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14961
14962 First, the set up.
14963
14964 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14965 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14966 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14967 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14968 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14969 end of the definition.
14970
14971 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14972 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14973 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14974 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14975 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14976 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14977 place point where we wish to start.
14978
14979 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14980 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14981 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14982
14983 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14984 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14985 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14986 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14987
14988 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14989 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14990 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14991 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14992 looping.
14993
14994 @need 1250
14995 The code looks like this:
14996
14997 @smallexample
14998 @group
14999 (beginning-of-defun)
15000 (let ((count 0)
15001 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
15002 @end group
15003 @end smallexample
15004
15005 @noindent
15006 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
15007 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
15008 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
15009 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
15010 definition.
15011
15012 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
15013 is the @code{while} loop.
15014
15015 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
15016 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
15017 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
15018 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
15019 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
15020 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
15021
15022 @smallexample
15023 @group
15024 (while (and (< (point) end)
15025 (re-search-forward
15026 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
15027 (setq count (1+ count)))
15028 @end group
15029 @end smallexample
15030
15031 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
15032 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
15033 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
15034 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
15035
15036 @need 1250
15037 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
15038
15039 @findex count-words-in-defun
15040 @smallexample
15041 @group
15042 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
15043 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
15044 (beginning-of-defun)
15045 (let ((count 0)
15046 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
15047 @end group
15048 @group
15049 (while
15050 (and (< (point) end)
15051 (re-search-forward
15052 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
15053 end t))
15054 (setq count (1+ count)))
15055 count))
15056 @end group
15057 @end smallexample
15058
15059 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
15060 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
15061 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
15062 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
15063
15064 @smallexample
15065 @group
15066 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
15067 (defun count-words-defun ()
15068 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
15069 (interactive)
15070 (message
15071 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
15072 @end group
15073 @group
15074 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
15075 (cond
15076 ((zerop count)
15077 (message
15078 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
15079 @end group
15080 @group
15081 ((= 1 count)
15082 (message
15083 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
15084 (t
15085 (message
15086 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
15087 @end group
15088 @end smallexample
15089
15090 @need 800
15091 @noindent
15092 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
15093
15094 @smallexample
15095 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
15096 @end smallexample
15097
15098 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
15099 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
15100 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
15101
15102 @smallexample
15103 @group
15104 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
15105 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
15106 (* 7 number))
15107 @result{} 10
15108 @end group
15109 @end smallexample
15110
15111 @noindent
15112 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
15113
15114 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
15115 several definitions within a single file.
15116
15117 @node Several defuns, Find a File, count-words-in-defun, Words in a defun
15118 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
15119
15120 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
15121 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
15122 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
15123 statistics on one file.
15124
15125 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
15126 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
15127
15128 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
15129 file with information about many other files; this means that the
15130 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
15131 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
15132 messages.
15133
15134 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
15135 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
15136 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
15137 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
15138 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
15139
15140 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
15141 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
15142 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
15143 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
15144 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
15145 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
15146 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
15147 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
15148 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
15149 is almost all there is to it.
15150
15151 @need 800
15152 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
15153
15154 @smallexample
15155 @group
15156 (goto-char (point-min))
15157 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15158 (setq lengths-list
15159 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15160 @end group
15161 @end smallexample
15162
15163 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
15164 contains the function definitions.
15165
15166 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
15167 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
15168 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
15169
15170 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
15171
15172 @node Find a File, lengths-list-file, Several defuns, Words in a defun
15173 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
15174 @section Find a File
15175 @cindex Find a File
15176
15177 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
15178 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
15179 problem.
15180
15181 @need 1200
15182 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
15183
15184 @smallexample
15185 @group
15186 (defun find-file (filename)
15187 "Edit file FILENAME.
15188 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15189 creating one if none already exists."
15190 (interactive "FFind file: ")
15191 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
15192 @end group
15193 @end smallexample
15194
15195 @noindent
15196 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
15197 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
15198 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
15199 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
15200 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
15201
15202 @ignore
15203 In Emacs 22
15204 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
15205 "Edit file FILENAME.
15206 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
15207 creating one if none already exists.
15208 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
15209 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
15210 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
15211
15212 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
15213 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
15214 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
15215
15216 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
15217 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
15218 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
15219 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
15220 (if (listp value)
15221 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
15222 (switch-to-buffer value))))
15223 @end ignore
15224
15225 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
15226 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
15227 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
15228 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
15229 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
15230
15231 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
15232 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
15233 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
15234 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
15235 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
15236 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
15237
15238 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
15239 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
15240 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
15241 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
15242 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
15243 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
15244 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
15245
15246 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
15247 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
15248 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
15249 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
15250 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
15251 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
15252 our own expression.
15253
15254 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
15255
15256 @node lengths-list-file, Several files, Find a File, Words in a defun
15257 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
15258
15259 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
15260 loop containing a function to move point forward `defun by defun' and
15261 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
15262 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
15263 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
15264 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
15265 @findex lengths-list-file
15266
15267 @smallexample
15268 @group
15269 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
15270 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
15271 The returned list is a list of numbers.
15272 Each number is the number of words or
15273 symbols in one function definition."
15274 @end group
15275 @group
15276 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
15277 (save-excursion
15278 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
15279 (lengths-list))
15280 (set-buffer buffer)
15281 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15282 (widen)
15283 (goto-char (point-min))
15284 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15285 (setq lengths-list
15286 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15287 (kill-buffer buffer)
15288 lengths-list)))
15289 @end group
15290 @end smallexample
15291
15292 @noindent
15293 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15294 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15295 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15296 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15297 message.
15298
15299 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15300 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15301 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15302 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15303
15304 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15305 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15306 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15307 variable.
15308
15309 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15310
15311 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15312 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15313 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15314 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15315 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15316 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15317 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15318 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15319 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15320 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15321
15322 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15323 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15324 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15325 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15326 be widened. If we wanted to be fully `user-friendly', we would
15327 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15328 won't.
15329
15330 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15331 beginning of the buffer.
15332
15333 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the `work' of the function is
15334 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15335 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15336
15337 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15338 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15339 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15340 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15341 of the files.
15342
15343 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15344 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15345 the whole function.
15346
15347 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15348 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15349 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15350
15351 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15352 @smallexample
15353 (lengths-list-file
15354 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15355 @end smallexample
15356
15357 @noindent
15358 (You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15359 GNU Emacs version 22.1.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15360 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15361
15362 @need 1200
15363 @noindent
15364 (Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15365 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15366
15367 @smallexample
15368 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15369 @end smallexample
15370
15371 @noindent
15372 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15373 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15374
15375 @need 1200
15376 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15377 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15378
15379 @smallexample
15380 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15381 @end smallexample
15382
15383 @need 1500
15384 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15385 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15386
15387 @smallexample
15388 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15389 @end smallexample
15390
15391 (The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15392 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15393
15394 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15395 the list.
15396
15397 @node Several files, Several files recursively, lengths-list-file, Words in a defun
15398 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15399
15400 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15401 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15402 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15403 a list of files.
15404
15405 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15406 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15407
15408 @menu
15409 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15410 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15411 @end menu
15412
15413 @node lengths-list-many-files, append, Several files, Several files
15414 @ifnottex
15415 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15416 @end ifnottex
15417
15418 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15419 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15420 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15421 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15422 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15423 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15424 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15425 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15426 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15427
15428 @need 800
15429 The template looks like this:
15430
15431 @smallexample
15432 @group
15433 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15434 @var{body}@dots{}
15435 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15436 @end group
15437 @end smallexample
15438
15439 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15440 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15441 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15442 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15443 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15444 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15445 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15446 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15447 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15448 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15449
15450 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15451 @need 1250
15452 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15453
15454 @smallexample
15455 @group
15456 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15457 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15458 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15459 @end group
15460 @group
15461 (let (lengths-list)
15462
15463 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15464 (while list-of-files
15465 (setq lengths-list
15466 (append
15467 lengths-list
15468
15469 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15470 (lengths-list-file
15471 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15472 @end group
15473
15474 @group
15475 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15476 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15477
15478 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15479 lengths-list))
15480 @end group
15481 @end smallexample
15482
15483 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15484 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15485 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15486
15487 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15488 @need 1500
15489 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15490 Emacs is visiting the
15491 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15492
15493 @smallexample
15494 debug.el
15495 @end smallexample
15496
15497 @need 800
15498 @noindent
15499 becomes
15500
15501 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15502 @smallexample
15503 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15504 @end smallexample
15505
15506 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15507 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15508 itself.
15509
15510 @node append, , lengths-list-many-files, Several files
15511 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15512
15513 @need 800
15514 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15515
15516 @smallexample
15517 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15518 @end smallexample
15519
15520 @need 800
15521 @noindent
15522 produces the list
15523
15524 @smallexample
15525 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15526 @end smallexample
15527
15528 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15529 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15530 @code{cons},
15531
15532 @smallexample
15533 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15534 @end smallexample
15535
15536 @need 1250
15537 @noindent
15538 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15539 becomes the first element of the new list:
15540
15541 @smallexample
15542 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15543 @end smallexample
15544
15545 @node Several files recursively, Prepare the data, Several files, Words in a defun
15546 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15547
15548 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15549 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15550 is short and simple.
15551
15552 The recursive function has the usual parts: the `do-again-test', the
15553 `next-step-expression', and the recursive call. The `do-again-test'
15554 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15555 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15556 the `next-step-expression' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15557 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15558 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15559 function is shorter than this description!
15560 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15561
15562 @smallexample
15563 @group
15564 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15565 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15566 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15567 (append
15568 (lengths-list-file
15569 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15570 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15571 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15572 @end group
15573 @end smallexample
15574
15575 @noindent
15576 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15577 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15578 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15579
15580 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15581 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15582 individually.
15583
15584 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15585 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15586 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15587 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15588 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15589 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15590
15591 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15592 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15593 Emacs may produce different results.)
15594
15595 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15596 @smallexample
15597 @group
15598 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15599
15600 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15601 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15602 @end group
15603
15604 @group
15605 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15606 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15607 @end group
15608
15609 @group
15610 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15611 @result{} (85 181)
15612 @end group
15613
15614 @group
15615 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15616 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15617 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15618 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15619 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15620 @end group
15621 @end smallexample
15622
15623 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15624 output we want.
15625
15626 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15627
15628 @node Prepare the data, , Several files recursively, Words in a defun
15629 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15630
15631 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15632 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15633 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15634 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15635 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15636 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15637 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15638
15639 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15640 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15641 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15642 numbers.
15643
15644 @menu
15645 * Data for Display in Detail::
15646 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15647 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15648 * Counting function definitions::
15649 @end menu
15650
15651 @node Data for Display in Detail, Sorting, Prepare the data, Prepare the data
15652 @ifnottex
15653 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15654 @end ifnottex
15655
15656 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15657 should not be too hard to write a function that `@sc{cdr}s' down the
15658 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15659 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15660
15661 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15662 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15663 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15664 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15665 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15666 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15667 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15668 that we will need.
15669
15670 @node Sorting, Files List, Data for Display in Detail, Prepare the data
15671 @subsection Sorting Lists
15672 @findex sort
15673
15674 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15675 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15676 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15677 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15678
15679 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15680 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15681 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15682 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15683 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15684 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15685 alphabetize a list.
15686
15687 @need 1250
15688 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15689
15690 @smallexample
15691 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15692 @end smallexample
15693
15694 @need 800
15695 @noindent
15696 produces this:
15697
15698 @smallexample
15699 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15700 @end smallexample
15701
15702 @noindent
15703 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15704 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15705 arguments.)
15706
15707 Sorting the list returned by the
15708 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15709 it uses the @code{<} function:
15710
15711 @ignore
15712 2006 Oct 29
15713 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15714 (progn
15715 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15716 (sort
15717 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15718 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15719 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15720 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15721 '<))
15722
15723 @end ignore
15724
15725 @smallexample
15726 @group
15727 (sort
15728 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15729 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15730 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15731 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15732 '<)
15733 @end group
15734 @end smallexample
15735
15736 @need 800
15737 @noindent
15738 which produces:
15739
15740 @smallexample
15741 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15742 @end smallexample
15743
15744 @noindent
15745 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15746 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15747 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15748
15749 @node Files List, Counting function definitions, Sorting, Prepare the data
15750 @subsection Making a List of Files
15751
15752 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15753 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15754 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15755 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15756 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15757 recursive call.
15758
15759 @findex directory-files
15760 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15761 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15762 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15763 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15764 pattern within a single directory.
15765
15766 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15767 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15768 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15769 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15770 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15771 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15772
15773 @findex files-in-below-directory
15774 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15775 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15776 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15777 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15778 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15779 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15780
15781 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15782 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15783 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15784
15785 @smallexample
15786 @group
15787 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15788 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15789 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15790 @end group
15791 @end smallexample
15792
15793 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15794 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15795 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15796 file -- which, in GNU/Linux, may be a `directory file', that is to
15797 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15798 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15799 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15800
15801 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15802 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15803 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15804 directory or a symbolic link.
15805
15806 @need 1000
15807 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15808 its attributes:
15809
15810 @smallexample
15811 @group
15812 ("abbrev.el"
15813 nil
15814 1
15815 1000
15816 100
15817 @end group
15818 @group
15819 (17733 259)
15820 (17491 28834)
15821 (17596 62124)
15822 13157
15823 "-rw-rw-r--"
15824 @end group
15825 @group
15826 nil
15827 2971624
15828 773)
15829 @end group
15830 @end smallexample
15831
15832 @need 1200
15833 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15834 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15835
15836 @smallexample
15837 @group
15838 ("mail"
15839 t
15840 @dots{}
15841 )
15842 @end group
15843 @end smallexample
15844
15845 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15846 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15847 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15848 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15849
15850 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15851 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15852 any directories below that directory.
15853
15854 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15855 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15856 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15857 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15858 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15859
15860 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15861 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15862 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15863 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15864 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15865 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15866 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15867 directory.
15868
15869 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15870 several tasks:
15871
15872 @itemize @bullet
15873 @item
15874 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15875 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15876
15877 @item
15878 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15879 directory; and if so,
15880
15881 @itemize @minus
15882 @item
15883 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15884 so skip it.
15885
15886 @item
15887 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15888 @end itemize
15889 @end itemize
15890
15891 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15892 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15893 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15894 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15895 pattern is `accumulate'
15896 (@pxref{Accumulate, , Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}}),
15897 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15898
15899 @ignore
15900 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15901 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15902
15903 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15904 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15905 @end ignore
15906
15907 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15908
15909 @need 800
15910 Here is the function:
15911
15912 @smallexample
15913 @group
15914 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15915 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15916 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15917 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15918 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15919 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15920 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15921 @end group
15922 @group
15923 (let (el-files-list
15924 (current-directory-list
15925 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15926 ;; while we are in the current directory
15927 (while current-directory-list
15928 @end group
15929 @group
15930 (cond
15931 ;; check to see whether filename ends in `.el'
15932 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15933 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15934 (setq el-files-list
15935 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15936 @end group
15937 @group
15938 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15939 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15940 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15941 (if
15942 (equal "."
15943 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15944 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15945 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15946 ()
15947 @end group
15948 @group
15949 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15950 (setq el-files-list
15951 (append
15952 (files-in-below-directory
15953 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15954 el-files-list)))))
15955 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15956 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15957 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15958 ;; return the filenames
15959 el-files-list))
15960 @end group
15961 @end smallexample
15962
15963 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15964 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15965
15966 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15967 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15968
15969 @need 1250
15970 Thus, on my system,
15971
15972 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15973
15974 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15975 @smallexample
15976 @group
15977 (length
15978 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15979 @end group
15980 @end smallexample
15981
15982 @noindent
15983 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15984 @samp{.el} files.
15985
15986 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15987 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15988 like this:
15989
15990 @smallexample
15991 @group
15992 (sort
15993 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15994 'string-lessp)
15995 @end group
15996 @end smallexample
15997
15998 @ignore
15999 (defun test ()
16000 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
16001 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
16002 (sit-for 0)
16003 (sort
16004 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
16005 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
16006 '<)
16007 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
16008 @end ignore
16009
16010 @node Counting function definitions, , Files List, Prepare the data
16011 @subsection Counting function definitions
16012
16013 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
16014 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
16015 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
16016 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
16017
16018 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
16019 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
16020 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
16021 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
16022 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
16023 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
16024 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
16025
16026 @need 1200
16027 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
16028 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
16029 @vindex top-of-ranges
16030
16031 @smallexample
16032 @group
16033 (defvar top-of-ranges
16034 '(10 20 30 40 50
16035 60 70 80 90 100
16036 110 120 130 140 150
16037 160 170 180 190 200
16038 210 220 230 240 250
16039 260 270 280 290 300)
16040 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
16041 @end group
16042 @end smallexample
16043
16044 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
16045
16046 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
16047 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
16048 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
16049 as arguments.
16050
16051 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
16052 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
16053 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
16054 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
16055 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
16056 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
16057 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
16058 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
16059 top-of-range values in turn.
16060
16061 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
16062 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16063 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
16064 small gear inside a big gear.
16065
16066 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
16067 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
16068 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
16069 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
16070 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
16071 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
16072 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
16073
16074 @need 1250
16075 The inner loop looks like this:
16076
16077 @smallexample
16078 @group
16079 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16080 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16081 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16082 @end group
16083 @end smallexample
16084
16085 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
16086 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
16087 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
16088
16089 @smallexample
16090 @group
16091 (while top-of-ranges
16092 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
16093 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16094 @end group
16095 @end smallexample
16096
16097 @need 1200
16098 Put together, the two loops look like this:
16099
16100 @smallexample
16101 @group
16102 (while top-of-ranges
16103
16104 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
16105 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
16106 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16107 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16108
16109 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16110 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
16111 @end group
16112 @end smallexample
16113
16114 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
16115 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
16116 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
16117 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
16118
16119 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
16120 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
16121 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
16122 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
16123 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
16124 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
16125 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
16126 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
16127 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
16128 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
16129 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
16130 @findex nreverse
16131
16132 @need 800
16133 For example,
16134
16135 @smallexample
16136 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
16137 @end smallexample
16138
16139 @need 800
16140 @noindent
16141 produces:
16142
16143 @smallexample
16144 (4 3 2 1)
16145 @end smallexample
16146
16147 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
16148 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
16149 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
16150 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
16151 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
16152 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
16153 as is.)
16154 @findex reverse
16155
16156 @need 1250
16157 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
16158
16159 @smallexample
16160 @group
16161 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16162 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
16163 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
16164 (number-within-range 0)
16165 defuns-per-range-list)
16166 @end group
16167
16168 @group
16169 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
16170 (while top-of-ranges
16171 @end group
16172
16173 @group
16174 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
16175 (while (and
16176 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
16177 (car sorted-lengths)
16178 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16179 @end group
16180
16181 @group
16182 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
16183 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
16184 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
16185
16186 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
16187 @end group
16188
16189 @group
16190 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16191 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
16192 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
16193 @end group
16194
16195 @group
16196 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
16197 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
16198 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
16199 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
16200 @end group
16201
16202 @group
16203 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
16204 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
16205 (setq defuns-per-range-list
16206 (cons
16207 (length sorted-lengths)
16208 defuns-per-range-list))
16209 @end group
16210
16211 @group
16212 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
16213 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
16214 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
16215 @end group
16216 @end smallexample
16217
16218 @need 1200
16219 @noindent
16220 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
16221 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
16222
16223 @smallexample
16224 @group
16225 (and (car sorted-lengths)
16226 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
16227 @end group
16228 @end smallexample
16229
16230 @need 800
16231 @noindent
16232 instead of like this:
16233
16234 @smallexample
16235 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
16236 @end smallexample
16237
16238 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
16239 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
16240 range.
16241
16242 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
16243 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
16244 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
16245 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
16246 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
16247 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
16248
16249 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
16250 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
16251 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
16252 the test will fail.
16253
16254 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16255 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
16256 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
16257 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
16258 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
16259 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
16260 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
16261 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
16262 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
16263 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
16264 of the @code{and} expression.
16265
16266 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
16267 This way, we avoid an error.
16268 @iftex
16269 @noindent
16270 (For information about @code{and}, see
16271 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
16272 @end iftex
16273 @ifinfo
16274 @noindent
16275 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
16276 information about @code{and}.)
16277 @end ifinfo
16278
16279 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16280 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16281 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16282 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16283 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16284
16285 @smallexample
16286 @group
16287 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16288 (setq top-of-ranges
16289 '(110 120 130 140 150
16290 160 170 180 190 200))
16291
16292 (setq sorted-lengths
16293 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16294
16295 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16296 @end group
16297 @end smallexample
16298
16299 @need 800
16300 @noindent
16301 The list returned looks like this:
16302
16303 @smallexample
16304 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16305 @end smallexample
16306
16307 @noindent
16308 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16309 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16310 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16311 of 200 or larger.
16312
16313 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16314 @node Readying a Graph, Emacs Initialization, Words in a defun, Top
16315 @chapter Readying a Graph
16316 @cindex Readying a graph
16317 @cindex Graph prototype
16318 @cindex Prototype graph
16319 @cindex Body of graph
16320
16321 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16322 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16323
16324 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16325 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16326 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16327 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16328 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16329 more.
16330
16331 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16332 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16333 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16334 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16335 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16336 the function to label the axes automatically.
16337
16338 @menu
16339 * Columns of a graph::
16340 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16341 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16342 * Printed Axes::
16343 * Line Graph Exercise::
16344 @end menu
16345
16346 @node Columns of a graph, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph, Readying a Graph
16347 @ifnottex
16348 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16349 @end ifnottex
16350
16351 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16352 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16353 be made from one of the `typewriter' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16354 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16355 symbol a user option.
16356
16357 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16358 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16359 label the graph, but only print its body.
16360
16361 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16362 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16363 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16364 @code{numbers-list}.
16365
16366 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16367 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16368
16369 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16370 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16371 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16372 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16373
16374 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16375 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16376 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16377 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16378 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16379 @findex apropos
16380
16381 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16382 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16383 the word `print' or the word `insert' or the word `column'.
16384 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16385 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16386 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16387 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16388 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16389 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16390 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16391
16392 @need 1200
16393 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16394
16395 @smallexample
16396 @group
16397 insert-rectangle:
16398 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16399 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16400 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16401 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16402 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16403 and point is at the lower right corner.
16404 @end group
16405 @end smallexample
16406
16407 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16408
16409 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16410 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16411 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16412 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16413 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16414
16415 @smallexample
16416 @group
16417 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16418 second
16419 thirdnil
16420 @end group
16421 @end smallexample
16422
16423 @noindent
16424 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16425 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16426 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16427 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16428 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16429 column of strings.
16430
16431 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16432 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16433 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16434 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16435 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16436 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16437 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16438 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16439 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16440 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16441
16442 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16443 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16444 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16445 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16446 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16447 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16448
16449 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16450 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16451 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16452 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16453 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16454 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16455 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16456 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16457
16458 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16459 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16460 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16461 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16462 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16463 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16464 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16465 be difficult.
16466
16467 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16468 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16469 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16470 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16471 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16472 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16473 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16474 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16475
16476 @smallexample
16477 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16478 @end smallexample
16479
16480 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16481 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16482 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16483 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16484 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16485 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16486 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16487 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16488 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16489 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16490 example,
16491
16492 @smallexample
16493 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16494 @end smallexample
16495
16496 @noindent
16497 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16498 smallest of all its arguments.)
16499 @findex max
16500 @findex min
16501
16502 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16503 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16504 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16505
16506 @smallexample
16507 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16508 @end smallexample
16509
16510 @need 800
16511 @noindent
16512 produces the following error message;
16513
16514 @smallexample
16515 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16516 @end smallexample
16517
16518 @findex apply
16519 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16520 This function is @code{apply}. This function `applies' its first
16521 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16522 may be a list.
16523
16524 @need 1250
16525 For example,
16526
16527 @smallexample
16528 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16529 @end smallexample
16530
16531 @noindent
16532 returns 8.
16533
16534 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16535 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16536 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16537 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16538 though its base in metaphor is clear---`apply' its first argument to
16539 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16540 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16541 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16542 it.)
16543
16544 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16545 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16546 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16547
16548 @smallexample
16549 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16550 @end smallexample
16551
16552 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16553 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16554 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16555 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16556 sorted or not.)
16557
16558 @need 800
16559 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16560
16561 @smallexample
16562 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16563 @end smallexample
16564
16565 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16566 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16567 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16568 function should return a list of strings for the
16569 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16570
16571 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16572 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16573 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16574 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16575 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16576 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16577
16578 @smallexample
16579 @group
16580 ;;; @r{First version.}
16581 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16582 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16583 (let ((insert-list nil)
16584 (number-of-top-blanks
16585 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16586 @end group
16587
16588 @group
16589 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16590 (while (> actual-height 0)
16591 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16592 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16593 @end group
16594
16595 @group
16596 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16597 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16598 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16599 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16600 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16601 @end group
16602
16603 @group
16604 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16605 insert-list))
16606 @end group
16607 @end smallexample
16608
16609 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16610 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16611
16612 @smallexample
16613 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16614 @end smallexample
16615
16616 @need 800
16617 @noindent
16618 returns
16619
16620 @smallexample
16621 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16622 @end smallexample
16623
16624 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16625 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16626 `hard-coded' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16627 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16628 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16629 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16630 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16631 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16632 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16633 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16634 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16635 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16636 those variables separately.
16637
16638 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16639 lead us to the second version of the function:
16640
16641 @smallexample
16642 @group
16643 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16644 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16645 @end group
16646
16647 @group
16648 (defvar graph-blank " "
16649 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16650 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16651 as graph-symbol.")
16652 @end group
16653 @end smallexample
16654
16655 @noindent
16656 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16657 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16658
16659 @smallexample
16660 @group
16661 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16662 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16663 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16664
16665 @end group
16666 @group
16667 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16668 of the list.
16669 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16670 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16671 @end group
16672
16673 @group
16674 (let ((insert-list nil)
16675 (number-of-top-blanks
16676 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16677 @end group
16678
16679 @group
16680 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16681 (while (> actual-height 0)
16682 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16683 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16684 @end group
16685
16686 @group
16687 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16688 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16689 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16690 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16691 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16692
16693 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16694 insert-list))
16695 @end group
16696 @end smallexample
16697
16698 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16699 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16700 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16701 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16702 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16703 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16704 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16705 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the `top blanks' to
16706 the list.
16707
16708 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16709 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16710 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16711 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16712 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16713 simple.
16714
16715 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16716 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16717 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16718
16719 @node graph-body-print, recursive-graph-body-print, Columns of a graph, Readying a Graph
16720 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16721 @findex graph-body-print
16722
16723 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16724 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16725 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16726 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16727 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16728 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16729 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16730
16731 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16732 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16733
16734 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16735 version of this function:
16736
16737 @smallexample
16738 @group
16739 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16740 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16741 (let ((height @dots{}
16742 @dots{}))
16743 @end group
16744
16745 @group
16746 (while numbers-list
16747 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16748 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16749 @end group
16750 @end smallexample
16751
16752 @noindent
16753 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16754
16755 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16756 determine the height of the graph.
16757
16758 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16759 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16760 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16761 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16762
16763 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16764 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16765 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16766 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16767 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16768 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16769 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16770
16771 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16772 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16773 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16774 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16775 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16776 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16777 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16778 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16779 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16780
16781 @need 1250
16782 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16783
16784 @smallexample
16785 @group
16786 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16787 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16788 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16789
16790 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16791 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16792 from-position)
16793 @end group
16794
16795 @group
16796 (while numbers-list
16797 (setq from-position (point))
16798 (insert-rectangle
16799 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16800 (goto-char from-position)
16801 (forward-char symbol-width)
16802 @end group
16803 @group
16804 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16805 (sit-for 0)
16806 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16807 @end group
16808 @group
16809 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16810 (forward-line height)
16811 (insert "\n")
16812 ))
16813 @end group
16814 @end smallexample
16815
16816 @noindent
16817 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16818 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16819 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16820 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16821 `sit' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16822 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16823 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16824 function exits.
16825
16826 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16827
16828 @enumerate
16829 @item
16830 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16831 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16832 @iftex
16833 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16834 @end iftex
16835 @ifinfo
16836 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16837 @end ifinfo
16838 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16839
16840 @need 800
16841 @item
16842 Copy the following expression:
16843
16844 @smallexample
16845 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16846 @end smallexample
16847
16848 @item
16849 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16850 want the graph to start.
16851
16852 @item
16853 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16854
16855 @item
16856 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16857 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16858
16859 @item
16860 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16861 @end enumerate
16862
16863 @need 800
16864 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16865
16866 @smallexample
16867 @group
16868 *
16869 * **
16870 * ****
16871 *** ****
16872 ********* *
16873 ************
16874 *************
16875 @end group
16876 @end smallexample
16877
16878 @node recursive-graph-body-print, Printed Axes, graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16879 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16880 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16881
16882 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16883 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside `wrapper'
16884 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16885 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16886 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16887 the graph.
16888
16889 @need 1250
16890 The `wrapper' is uncomplicated:
16891
16892 @smallexample
16893 @group
16894 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16895 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16896 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16897 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16898 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16899 from-position)
16900 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16901 numbers-list
16902 height
16903 symbol-width)))
16904 @end group
16905 @end smallexample
16906
16907 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16908 the `do-again-test', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16909 `next-step-expression'. The `do-again-test' is a @code{when}
16910 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16911 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16912 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16913 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16914 `next-step-expression' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16915 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16916
16917 @smallexample
16918 @group
16919 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16920 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16921 "Print a bar graph.
16922 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16923 @end group
16924
16925 @group
16926 (when numbers-list
16927 (setq from-position (point))
16928 (insert-rectangle
16929 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16930 @end group
16931 @group
16932 (goto-char from-position)
16933 (forward-char symbol-width)
16934 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16935 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16936 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16937 @end group
16938 @end smallexample
16939
16940 @need 1250
16941 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16942
16943 @smallexample
16944 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16945 @end smallexample
16946
16947 @need 800
16948 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16949
16950 @smallexample
16951 @group
16952 *
16953 ** *
16954 **** *
16955 **** ***
16956 * *********
16957 ************
16958 *************
16959 @end group
16960 @end smallexample
16961
16962 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16963 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16964
16965 @node Printed Axes, Line Graph Exercise, recursive-graph-body-print, Readying a Graph
16966 @section Need for Printed Axes
16967
16968 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16969 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16970 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16971
16972 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16973 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16974 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16975 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16976 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16977
16978 @node Line Graph Exercise, , Printed Axes, Readying a Graph
16979 @section Exercise
16980
16981 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16982
16983 @node Emacs Initialization, Debugging, Readying a Graph, Top
16984 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16985 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16986 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16987 @cindex Initialization file
16988
16989 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' -- this seemingly
16990 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, `out of
16991 the box' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16992 it to suit themselves.
16993
16994 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16995 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16996
16997 @menu
16998 * Default Configuration::
16999 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
17000 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
17001 * Beginning a .emacs File:: How to write a @code{.emacs file}.
17002 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
17003 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
17004 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
17005 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
17006 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
17007 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
17008 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
17009 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
17010 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
17011 * Miscellaneous::
17012 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
17013 @end menu
17014
17015 @node Default Configuration, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization, Emacs Initialization
17016 @ifnottex
17017 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
17018 @end ifnottex
17019
17020 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
17021 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
17022 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
17023 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
17024 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
17025 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
17026 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
17027 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
17028 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
17029 now provided by CC mode, the `C Collection'.)
17030
17031 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
17032 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
17033
17034 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
17035 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
17036 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
17037
17038 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
17039 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
17040 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
17041 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
17042 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
17043 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
17044 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
17045 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
17046
17047 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
17048 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
17049 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
17050 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
17051
17052 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
17053 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
17054 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
17055
17056 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
17057 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
17058 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
17059 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17060 Manual}.
17061
17062 @node Site-wide Init, defcustom, Default Configuration, Emacs Initialization
17063 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
17064
17065 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
17066 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
17067 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
17068 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
17069 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
17070 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
17071 everyone.
17072
17073 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
17074 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then `dumped' if a
17075 `dumped' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
17076 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
17077 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
17078 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
17079 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
17080 @file{INSTALL} file.)
17081
17082 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
17083 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
17084 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
17085 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
17086 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
17087
17088 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
17089 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
17090 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
17091 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
17092 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
17093 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
17094 Simple Extension}.)
17095
17096 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
17097 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
17098 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
17099
17100 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
17101 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
17102 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
17103
17104 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
17105 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
17106 initialization file.
17107
17108 @node defcustom, Beginning a .emacs File, Site-wide Init, Emacs Initialization
17109 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
17110 @findex defcustom
17111
17112 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
17113 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
17114 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
17115 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
17116 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
17117 file.)
17118
17119 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} special
17120 form. Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables
17121 that users set, the @code{defcustom} special form is designed for the
17122 job.
17123
17124 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
17125 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
17126 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
17127 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
17128 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
17129 documentation.
17130
17131 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
17132 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
17133 arguments are optional.)
17134
17135 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
17136 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
17137
17138 @need 1250
17139 For example, the customizable user option variable
17140 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
17141
17142 @smallexample
17143 @group
17144 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
17145 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
17146 :type 'hook
17147 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
17148 :group 'data)
17149 @end group
17150 @end smallexample
17151
17152 @noindent
17153 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
17154 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
17155
17156 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
17157 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
17158 Customization buffer.
17159
17160 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
17161 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
17162 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
17163 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
17164 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
17165 user.
17166
17167 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
17168 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
17169 find it.
17170
17171 The @code{defcustom} function recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
17172 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
17173 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
17174
17175 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
17176
17177 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
17178 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
17179
17180 @need 800
17181 Using the customization command, you can type:
17182
17183 @smallexample
17184 M-x customize
17185 @end smallexample
17186
17187 @noindent
17188 and find that the group for editing files of data is called `data'.
17189 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
17190 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
17191 values. After you click on the button to
17192
17193 @smallexample
17194 Save for Future Sessions
17195 @end smallexample
17196
17197 @noindent
17198 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
17199 It will look like this:
17200
17201 @smallexample
17202 @group
17203 (custom-set-variables
17204 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
17205 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
17206 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
17207 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
17208 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
17209 @end group
17210 @end smallexample
17211
17212 @noindent
17213 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
17214 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
17215 It comes on automatically.)
17216
17217 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
17218 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
17219 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17220 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
17221 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
17222 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
17223
17224 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
17225 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
17226 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
17227 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
17228 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
17229
17230 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
17231 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
17232 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
17233
17234 @need 800
17235 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
17236 message that says
17237
17238 @smallexample
17239 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
17240 @end smallexample
17241
17242 @need 800
17243 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
17244
17245 @smallexample
17246 Save for Future Sessions
17247 @end smallexample
17248
17249 @noindent
17250 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
17251 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
17252 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
17253 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
17254 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
17255 forget, you may confuse yourself.
17256
17257 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
17258 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
17259 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
17260
17261 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
17262 expressions myself.
17263
17264 @findex defsubst
17265 @findex defconst
17266 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
17267 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
17268 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
17269 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
17270 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
17271 variable; but please do not.)
17272
17273 @node Beginning a .emacs File, Text and Auto-fill, defcustom, Emacs Initialization
17274 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
17275 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
17276
17277 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
17278 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
17279 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17280
17281 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17282 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17283 definitions.
17284
17285 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17286 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17287
17288 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17289 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17290
17291 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17292 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17293 not.
17294
17295 @need 1200
17296 @smallexample
17297 @group
17298 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17299 ; Robert J. Chassell
17300 ; 26 September 1985
17301 @end group
17302 @end smallexample
17303
17304 @noindent
17305 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17306 adding to it ever since.
17307
17308 @smallexample
17309 @group
17310 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17311 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17312 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17313 ; three semicolons.
17314 @end group
17315 @end smallexample
17316
17317 @noindent
17318 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17319 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17320 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17321 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17322 more about comments.)
17323
17324 @smallexample
17325 @group
17326 ;;;; The Help Key
17327 ; Control-h is the help key;
17328 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17329 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17330 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17331 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17332 @end group
17333 @end smallexample
17334
17335 @noindent
17336 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17337
17338 @smallexample
17339 @group
17340 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17341 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17342 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17343 ; control-h m.
17344 @end group
17345 @end smallexample
17346
17347 @noindent
17348 `Mode help', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17349 all you need to know.
17350
17351 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17352 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17353 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17354 remember to look here to remind myself.
17355
17356 @node Text and Auto-fill, Mail Aliases, Beginning a .emacs File, Emacs Initialization
17357 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17358
17359 Now we come to the part that `turns on' Text mode and
17360 Auto Fill mode.
17361
17362 @smallexample
17363 @group
17364 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17365 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17366 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17367 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17368 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17369 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17370 @end group
17371 @end smallexample
17372
17373 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17374 besides remind a forgetful human!
17375
17376 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17377 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17378 other mode, such as C mode.
17379
17380 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17381 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17382 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17383 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17384 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17385 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17386 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17387 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17388 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17389 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17390 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17391 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17392
17393 @ifinfo
17394 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17395 Emacs Manual}.
17396
17397 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17398 Manual}.
17399 @end ifinfo
17400 @iftex
17401 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17402 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17403 @end iftex
17404
17405 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17406
17407 @need 800
17408 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17409
17410 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17411 @smallexample
17412 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17413 @end smallexample
17414
17415 @noindent
17416 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17417
17418 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17419 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17420 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17421 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17422 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17423 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17424 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17425 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17426 anywhere else in Emacs.
17427
17428 @need 800
17429 Here is the next line:
17430
17431 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17432 @findex add-hook
17433 @smallexample
17434 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17435 @end smallexample
17436
17437 @noindent
17438 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17439 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17440
17441 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17442 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17443
17444 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands `hooked'
17445 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17446 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17447
17448 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17449 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17450 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17451
17452 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17453 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17454 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17455 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17456 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17457 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17458
17459 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17460 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17461 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17462 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17463
17464 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17465 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17466 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17467 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17468 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17469
17470 @need 1250
17471 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17472 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17473
17474 @smallexample
17475 (setq colon-double-space t)
17476 @end smallexample
17477
17478 @node Mail Aliases, Indent Tabs Mode, Text and Auto-fill, Emacs Initialization
17479 @section Mail Aliases
17480
17481 Here is a @code{setq} that `turns on' mail aliases, along with more
17482 reminders.
17483
17484 @smallexample
17485 @group
17486 ;;; Mail mode
17487 ; To enter mail mode, type `C-x m'
17488 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17489 ; type `M-x rmail'
17490 (setq mail-aliases t)
17491 @end group
17492 @end smallexample
17493
17494 @cindex Mail aliases
17495 @noindent
17496 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17497 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17498 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17499
17500 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17501 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your `aliases'
17502 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17503
17504 @smallexample
17505 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17506 @end smallexample
17507
17508 @noindent
17509 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17510 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17511
17512 @node Indent Tabs Mode, Keybindings, Mail Aliases, Emacs Initialization
17513 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17514 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17515 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17516
17517 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17518 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17519 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17520 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17521 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17522
17523 @need 1250
17524 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17525
17526 @smallexample
17527 @group
17528 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17529 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17530 @end group
17531 @end smallexample
17532
17533 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17534 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17535 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17536 values for the variable.
17537
17538 @ifinfo
17539 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs. Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17540
17541 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17542 Manual}.
17543 @end ifinfo
17544 @iftex
17545 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17546 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17547 @end iftex
17548
17549 @need 1700
17550 @node Keybindings, Keymaps, Indent Tabs Mode, Emacs Initialization
17551 @section Some Keybindings
17552
17553 Now for some personal keybindings:
17554
17555 @smallexample
17556 @group
17557 ;;; Compare windows
17558 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17559 @end group
17560 @end smallexample
17561
17562 @findex compare-windows
17563 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17564 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17565 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17566 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17567
17568 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17569
17570 @cindex Setting a key globally
17571 @cindex Global set key
17572 @cindex Key setting globally
17573 @findex global-set-key
17574 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17575 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17576 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for `control-c', which means `press the
17577 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time'. The @code{w} means
17578 `press the @key{w} key'. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17579 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17580 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17581 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17582 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17583 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17584 details.)
17585
17586 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17587 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17588 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17589
17590 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17591 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17592 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17593 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17594 adapt what is there.
17595
17596 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17597 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17598 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17599 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these `own' keys, since
17600 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17601 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17602 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17603 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17604 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of `own' keys.
17605
17606 @need 1250
17607 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17608
17609 @smallexample
17610 @group
17611 ;;; Keybinding for `occur'
17612 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17613 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17614 @end group
17615 @end smallexample
17616
17617 @findex occur
17618 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17619 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17620 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17621 to jump to occurrences.
17622
17623 @findex global-unset-key
17624 @cindex Unbinding key
17625 @cindex Key unbinding
17626 @need 1250
17627 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17628 work:
17629
17630 @smallexample
17631 @group
17632 ;;; Unbind `C-x f'
17633 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17634 @end group
17635 @end smallexample
17636
17637 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17638 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17639 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17640 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17641 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17642
17643 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17644 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17645 @need 1250
17646 The following rebinds an existing key:
17647
17648 @smallexample
17649 @group
17650 ;;; Rebind `C-x C-b' for `buffer-menu'
17651 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17652 @end group
17653 @end smallexample
17654
17655 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17656 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17657 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17658 almost always want to do something in that
17659 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17660 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17661 but moves point into that window.
17662
17663 @node Keymaps, Loading Files, Keybindings, Emacs Initialization
17664 @section Keymaps
17665 @cindex Keymaps
17666 @cindex Rebinding keys
17667
17668 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17669 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17670 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17671 @code{current-global-map}.
17672
17673 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17674 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17675 all buffers.
17676
17677 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17678 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17679 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17680
17681 @smallexample
17682 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17683 @end smallexample
17684
17685 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17686 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17687 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17688 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17689 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17690
17691 @smallexample
17692 @group
17693 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17694 @end group
17695 @end smallexample
17696
17697 @noindent
17698 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17699 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17700 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17701 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17702 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17703 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17704 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17705
17706 @need 1250
17707 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17708
17709 @smallexample
17710 @group
17711 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17712 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17713 (interactive)
17714 (beginning-of-line)
17715 (insert "@@group\n"))
17716 @end group
17717 @end smallexample
17718
17719 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17720 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17721 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17722
17723 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17724 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17725 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17726
17727 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17728 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17729 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17730
17731 @node Loading Files, Autoload, Keymaps, Emacs Initialization
17732 @section Loading Files
17733 @cindex Loading files
17734 @c findex load
17735
17736 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17737 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17738 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17739 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17740
17741 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17742 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17743 For example:
17744
17745 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17746
17747 @smallexample
17748 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17749 @end smallexample
17750
17751 This evaluates, i.e.@: loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17752 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17753 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17754 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17755 1989.
17756
17757 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17758 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17759 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17760 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17761 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17762 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17763 window.
17764
17765 @need 1250
17766 To replace the key binding for the default
17767 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17768 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17769
17770 @smallexample
17771 @group
17772 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17773 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17774 @end group
17775 @end smallexample
17776
17777 @vindex load-path
17778 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17779 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17780 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17781 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17782 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17783 when Emacs is built.)
17784
17785 @need 1250
17786 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17787 existing load path:
17788
17789 @smallexample
17790 @group
17791 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17792 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17793 @end group
17794 @end smallexample
17795
17796 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17797 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17798
17799 @findex load-library
17800 @smallexample
17801 @group
17802 (defun load-library (library)
17803 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17804 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17805 (interactive
17806 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17807 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17808 load-path
17809 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17810 (load library))
17811 @end group
17812 @end smallexample
17813
17814 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17815 `library' as a conventional synonym for `file'. The source for the
17816 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17817
17818 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17819 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17820 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17821 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17822
17823 @node Autoload, Simple Extension, Loading Files, Emacs Initialization
17824 @section Autoloading
17825 @findex autoload
17826
17827 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17828 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17829 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17830 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17831
17832 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17833 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17834
17835 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17836 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17837 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17838
17839 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17840 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains hundreds of autoloaded functions,
17841 from @code{bookmark-set} to @code{wordstar-mode}. Of course, you may
17842 come to use a `rare' function frequently. When you do, you should
17843 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17844 @file{.emacs} file.
17845
17846 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17847 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17848 better to include these files in my `dumped' Emacs, but I forgot.
17849 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17850 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17851 dumping.)
17852
17853 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17854 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17855 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17856 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17857 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17858 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17859 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17860 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17861 function (the default is a function).
17862
17863 @need 800
17864 Here is a typical example:
17865
17866 @smallexample
17867 @group
17868 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17869 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17870 @end group
17871 @end smallexample
17872
17873 @noindent
17874 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17875 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17876
17877 @noindent
17878 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17879 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17880 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17881 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17882 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17883 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17884 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17885 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17886 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17887 documentation is not available.)
17888
17889 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17890 Manual}, for more information.
17891
17892 @node Simple Extension, X11 Colors, Autoload, Emacs Initialization
17893 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17894 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17895 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17896
17897 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17898 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17899 to read.
17900
17901 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17902 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17903 @file{.emacs} file.
17904
17905 @need 1250
17906 Here is the definition:
17907
17908 @smallexample
17909 @group
17910 ;;; Line to top of window;
17911 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17912 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17913 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17914 (interactive)
17915 (recenter 0))
17916 @end group
17917 @end smallexample
17918
17919 @need 1250
17920 Now for the keybinding.
17921
17922 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17923 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17924 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17925 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17926
17927 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17928 this:
17929
17930 @smallexample
17931 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17932 @end smallexample
17933
17934 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17935 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17936
17937 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17938 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17939 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17940 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17941 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17942 the following conditional:
17943
17944 @smallexample
17945 @group
17946 (cond
17947 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17948 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17949 ( @dots{} ))
17950 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17951 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17952 ( @dots{} )))
17953 @end group
17954 @end smallexample
17955
17956 For example, recent versions blink
17957 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17958 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17959 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17960 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17961
17962 @smallexample
17963 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17964
17965 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17966
17967 emacs -Q - D
17968 @end smallexample
17969 }:
17970
17971 @smallexample
17972 @group
17973 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17974 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17975 ;; Insert newline when you press `C-n' (next-line)
17976 ;; at the end of the buffer
17977 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17978 @end group
17979 @group
17980 ;; Turn on image viewing
17981 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17982 @end group
17983 @group
17984 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17985 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17986 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17987 @end group
17988 @group
17989 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17990 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17991 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17992 @end group
17993 @group
17994 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17995 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17996 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17997 (tooltip-mode nil)
17998 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17999 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
18000 )
18001 @end group
18002 @end smallexample
18003
18004 @node X11 Colors, Miscellaneous, Simple Extension, Emacs Initialization
18005 @section X11 Colors
18006
18007 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
18008 system.
18009
18010 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
18011
18012 @need 1250
18013 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
18014 file that set values:
18015
18016 @smallexample
18017 @group
18018 ;; Set cursor color
18019 (set-cursor-color "white")
18020
18021 ;; Set mouse color
18022 (set-mouse-color "white")
18023
18024 ;; Set foreground and background
18025 (set-foreground-color "white")
18026 (set-background-color "darkblue")
18027 @end group
18028
18029 @group
18030 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
18031 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
18032 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
18033 @end group
18034
18035 @group
18036 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
18037 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
18038 @end group
18039
18040 @group
18041 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
18042 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
18043 @end group
18044
18045 @group
18046 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
18047 (setq calendar-load-hook
18048 '(lambda ()
18049 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
18050 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
18051 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
18052 @end group
18053 @end smallexample
18054
18055 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
18056 the screen flicker.
18057
18058 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
18059 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
18060 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
18061 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
18062
18063 @smallexample
18064 @group
18065 Emacs*foreground: white
18066 Emacs*background: darkblue
18067 Emacs*cursorColor: white
18068 Emacs*pointerColor: white
18069 @end group
18070 @end smallexample
18071
18072 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
18073 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
18074 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
18075 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
18076
18077 @smallexample
18078 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
18079 @end smallexample
18080
18081 @need 1700
18082 @node Miscellaneous, Mode Line, X11 Colors, Emacs Initialization
18083 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
18084
18085 @need 1250
18086 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
18087 @sp 1
18088
18089 @itemize @minus
18090 @item
18091 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
18092
18093 @smallexample
18094 @group
18095 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
18096 ; `/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
18097 ; for example, the `target' cursor is number 128;
18098 ; the `top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
18099 @end group
18100
18101 @group
18102 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
18103 "*emacs*mpointer")))
18104 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
18105 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
18106 (if (eq mpointer nil)
18107 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
18108 @end group
18109 @group
18110 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
18111 (set-mouse-color "white"))
18112 @end group
18113 @end smallexample
18114
18115 @item
18116 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
18117 this:
18118
18119 @smallexample
18120 @group
18121 (setq-default
18122 default-frame-alist
18123 '((cursor-color . "white")
18124 (mouse-color . "white")
18125 (foreground-color . "white")
18126 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
18127 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
18128 (cursor-type . box)
18129 @end group
18130 @group
18131 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
18132 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
18133 (width . 80)
18134 (height . 58)
18135 (font .
18136 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
18137 ))
18138 @end group
18139 @end smallexample
18140
18141 @item
18142 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
18143 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
18144 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
18145 problem recently.)
18146
18147 @smallexample
18148 @group
18149 ;; Translate `C-h' to <DEL>.
18150 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
18151
18152 ;; Translate <DEL> to `C-h'.
18153 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
18154 @end group
18155 @end smallexample
18156
18157 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
18158
18159 @smallexample
18160 @group
18161 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
18162 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
18163 @end group
18164 @end smallexample
18165
18166 @noindent
18167 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
18168
18169 @need 1250
18170 @item When using `grep'@*
18171 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
18172 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
18173 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
18174 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
18175
18176 @smallexample
18177 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
18178 @end smallexample
18179
18180 @ignore
18181 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
18182
18183 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
18184
18185 smallexample
18186 (load "uncompress")
18187 end smallexample
18188
18189 @end ignore
18190
18191 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
18192 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
18193
18194 @smallexample
18195 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
18196 @end smallexample
18197
18198 @item Set your language environment and default input method
18199
18200 @smallexample
18201 @group
18202 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
18203 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
18204 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
18205 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
18206 @end group
18207 @end smallexample
18208
18209 If you want to write with Chinese `GB' characters, set this instead:
18210
18211 @smallexample
18212 @group
18213 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
18214 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
18215 @end group
18216 @end smallexample
18217 @end itemize
18218
18219 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
18220 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
18221 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
18222
18223 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
18224 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
18225 of the home row.
18226
18227 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
18228 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
18229 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
18230 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
18231 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
18232
18233 @need 1250
18234 @noindent
18235 For a boot script:
18236
18237 @smallexample
18238 @group
18239 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
18240 @exdent or
18241 install-keymap emacs2
18242 @end group
18243 @end smallexample
18244
18245 @need 1250
18246 @noindent
18247 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
18248 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
18249
18250 @smallexample
18251 @group
18252 # Bind the key labeled `Caps Lock' to `Control'
18253 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
18254 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
18255
18256 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
18257 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
18258 @end group
18259 @end smallexample
18260
18261 @need 1250
18262 @noindent
18263 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
18264 key to a @key{META} key:
18265
18266 @smallexample
18267 @group
18268 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
18269 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
18270 @end group
18271 @end smallexample
18272
18273 @need 1700
18274 @node Mode Line, , Miscellaneous, Emacs Initialization
18275 @section A Modified Mode Line
18276 @vindex mode-line-format
18277 @cindex Mode line format
18278
18279 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18280
18281 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18282 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18283
18284 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18285
18286 @smallexample
18287 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18288 @end smallexample
18289
18290 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18291 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18292 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18293
18294 @need 1200
18295 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18296
18297 @smallexample
18298 @group
18299 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18300 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18301 (setq-default mode-line-format
18302 (quote
18303 (#("-" 0 1
18304 (help-echo
18305 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18306 mode-line-mule-info
18307 mode-line-modified
18308 mode-line-frame-identification
18309 " "
18310 @end group
18311 @group
18312 mode-line-buffer-identification
18313 " "
18314 (:eval (substring
18315 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18316 ":"
18317 default-directory
18318 #(" " 0 1
18319 (help-echo
18320 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18321 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18322 global-mode-string
18323 @end group
18324 @group
18325 #(" %[(" 0 6
18326 (help-echo
18327 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18328 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18329 mode-line-process
18330 minor-mode-alist
18331 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18332 ")%] "
18333 (-3 . "%P")
18334 ;; "-%-"
18335 )))
18336 @end group
18337 @end smallexample
18338
18339 @noindent
18340 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18341 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18342 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18343 it.
18344
18345 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18346 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18347 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18348 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18349 have not discussed.
18350
18351 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18352 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18353 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18354 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18355 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18356 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18357 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18358 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18359
18360 @need 1000
18361 The new string format has a special syntax:
18362
18363 @smallexample
18364 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18365 @end smallexample
18366
18367 @noindent
18368 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18369 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18370 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18371 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18372 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18373 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18374 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18375 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18376 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18377 string format can be repeated.
18378
18379 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18380 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18381 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18382
18383 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18384 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18385 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18386 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18387
18388 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18389 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the `12'
18390 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18391 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18392 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18393 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18394 window.)
18395
18396 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18397 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18398 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18399 a @samp{.} (`period'), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18400 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18401 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18402
18403 @need 1250
18404 This is the expression:
18405
18406 @smallexample
18407 @group
18408 (:eval (substring
18409 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18410 @end group
18411 @end smallexample
18412
18413 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18414 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says `Narrow'
18415 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18416 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or `Top', `Bottom',
18417 or `All'. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18418 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18419 out the line.
18420
18421 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it'' --- your own
18422 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18423 keys than a default Emacs.
18424
18425 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain `out of the box'
18426 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18427
18428 @smallexample
18429 emacs -q
18430 @end smallexample
18431
18432 @noindent
18433 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18434 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18435 more.
18436
18437 @node Debugging, Conclusion, Emacs Initialization, Top
18438 @chapter Debugging
18439 @cindex debugging
18440
18441 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18442 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18443 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18444
18445 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18446 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18447 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18448
18449 @menu
18450 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18451 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18452 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18453 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18454 * Debugging Exercises::
18455 @end menu
18456
18457 @node debug, debug-on-entry, Debugging, Debugging
18458 @section @code{debug}
18459 @findex debug
18460
18461 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18462 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18463 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18464 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18465 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18466
18467 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18468 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18469
18470 @findex triangle-bugged
18471 @smallexample
18472 @group
18473 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18474 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18475 (let ((total 0))
18476 (while (> number 0)
18477 (setq total (+ total number))
18478 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18479 total))
18480 @end group
18481 @end smallexample
18482
18483 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18484 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18485 echo area.
18486
18487 @need 1250
18488 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18489 argument of 4:
18490
18491 @smallexample
18492 (triangle-bugged 4)
18493 @end smallexample
18494
18495 @noindent
18496 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18497 buffer that says:
18498
18499 @noindent
18500 @smallexample
18501 @group
18502 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18503 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18504 (1= number)
18505 (setq number (1= number))
18506 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18507 (setq number (1= number)))
18508 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18509 (setq number ...)) total)
18510 triangle-bugged(4)
18511 @end group
18512 @group
18513 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18514 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18515 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18516 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18517 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18518 @end group
18519 @end smallexample
18520
18521 @noindent
18522 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18523 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18524 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18525
18526 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the `Lisp error' line will
18527 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18528 function @code{1=} is `void'.
18529
18530 @ignore
18531 @need 800
18532 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18533
18534 @smallexample
18535 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18536 @end smallexample
18537
18538 @noindent
18539 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18540 version 21.
18541 @end ignore
18542
18543 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18544 You can read the complete backtrace.
18545
18546 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18547 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18548 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18549
18550 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18551 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18552 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18553 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18554 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18555
18556 @need 1250
18557 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18558
18559 @smallexample
18560 (setq number (1= number))
18561 @end smallexample
18562
18563 @noindent
18564 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18565 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18566 top:
18567
18568 @smallexample
18569 (1= number)
18570 @end smallexample
18571
18572 @need 1250
18573 @noindent
18574 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18575
18576 @smallexample
18577 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18578 @end smallexample
18579
18580 @noindent
18581 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18582 then run your test again.
18583
18584 @node debug-on-entry, debug-on-quit, debug, Debugging
18585 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18586 @findex debug-on-entry
18587
18588 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18589 function has an error.
18590
18591 @ignore
18592 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18593 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18594 manually.
18595 @end ignore
18596
18597 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18598 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18599 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18600
18601 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18602 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18603
18604 @need 1250
18605 @noindent
18606 Type:
18607
18608 @smallexample
18609 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18610 @end smallexample
18611
18612 @need 1250
18613 @noindent
18614 Now, evaluate the following:
18615
18616 @smallexample
18617 (triangle-bugged 5)
18618 @end smallexample
18619
18620 @noindent
18621 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18622 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18623 function:
18624
18625 @smallexample
18626 @group
18627 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18628 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18629 * triangle-bugged(5)
18630 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18631 @end group
18632 @group
18633 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18634 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18635 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18636 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18637 @end group
18638 @end smallexample
18639
18640 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18641 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18642 like this:
18643
18644 @smallexample
18645 @group
18646 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18647 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18648 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18649 (setq number ...)) total)
18650 * triangle-bugged(5)
18651 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18652 @end group
18653 @group
18654 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18655 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18656 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18657 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18658 @end group
18659 @end smallexample
18660
18661 @noindent
18662 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18663 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18664 definition.
18665
18666 @need 1750
18667 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18668
18669 @smallexample
18670 @group
18671 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18672 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18673 * (setq number (1= number))
18674 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18675 (setq number (1= number)))
18676 @group
18677 @end group
18678 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18679 (setq number ...)) total)
18680 * triangle-bugged(5)
18681 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18682 @group
18683 @end group
18684 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18685 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18686 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18687 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18688 @end group
18689 @end smallexample
18690
18691 @need 1500
18692 @noindent
18693 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18694 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18695 like this:
18696
18697 @smallexample
18698 @group
18699 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18700 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18701 * (1= number)
18702 @dots{}
18703 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18704 @end group
18705 @end smallexample
18706
18707 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18708
18709 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18710 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18711
18712 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18713 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18714 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18715
18716 @smallexample
18717 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18718 @end smallexample
18719
18720 @noindent
18721 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18722
18723 @node debug-on-quit, edebug, debug-on-entry, Debugging
18724 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18725
18726 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18727 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18728
18729 @findex debug-on-quit
18730 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18731 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18732 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18733
18734 @need 1500
18735 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18736 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18737 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18738
18739 @smallexample
18740 @group
18741 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18742 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18743 (let ((total 0))
18744 (while (> number 0)
18745 (setq total (+ total number))
18746 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18747 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18748 total))
18749 @end group
18750 @end smallexample
18751
18752 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18753 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18754
18755 @node edebug, Debugging Exercises, debug-on-quit, Debugging
18756 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18757 @cindex Source level debugger
18758 @findex edebug
18759
18760 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18761 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18762 shows which line you are currently executing.
18763
18764 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18765 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18766
18767 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18768 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18769
18770 @need 1250
18771 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18772 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18773 for a review of it.
18774
18775 @smallexample
18776 @group
18777 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18778 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18779 Uses recursion."
18780 (if (= number 1)
18781 1
18782 (+ number
18783 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18784 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18785 @end group
18786 @end smallexample
18787
18788 @noindent
18789 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18790 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18791 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18792 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18793 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18794 Interaction mode.)
18795
18796 @need 1500
18797 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18798 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18799 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18800 and typing
18801
18802 @smallexample
18803 M-x edebug-defun RET
18804 @end smallexample
18805
18806 @noindent
18807 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18808 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18809
18810 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18811 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18812
18813 @smallexample
18814 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18815 @end smallexample
18816
18817 @noindent
18818 You will be jumped back to the source for
18819 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18820 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18821 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18822 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18823 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18824 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window `fringe'.)
18825
18826 @smallexample
18827 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18828 @end smallexample
18829
18830 @noindent
18831 @iftex
18832 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18833 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18834 @end iftex
18835 @ifnottex
18836 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18837 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18838 @end ifnottex
18839
18840 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18841 be executed; the line will look like this:
18842
18843 @smallexample
18844 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18845 @end smallexample
18846
18847 @noindent
18848 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18849 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18850 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18851 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18852
18853 @smallexample
18854 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18855 @end smallexample
18856
18857 @noindent
18858 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18859 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} `control-c' (the third letter of the
18860 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18861
18862 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18863 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18864
18865 @smallexample
18866 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18867 @end smallexample
18868
18869 @need 1250
18870 @noindent
18871 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18872 that says:
18873
18874 @smallexample
18875 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18876 @end smallexample
18877
18878 @noindent
18879 This is the bug.
18880
18881 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18882
18883 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18884 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18885 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18886 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18887
18888 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18889 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18890 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18891 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18892 times a function is called, and more.
18893
18894 Edebug is described in @ref{edebug, , Edebug, elisp, The GNU Emacs
18895 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18896
18897 @need 1500
18898 @node Debugging Exercises, , edebug, Debugging
18899 @section Debugging Exercises
18900
18901 @itemize @bullet
18902 @item
18903 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18904 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18905 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18906 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a `hook' called after
18907 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18908 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18909 Manual}.)
18910
18911 @item
18912 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18913 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18914 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18915 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18916 completes without problems.
18917
18918 @item
18919 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18920 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.@:
18921 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18922 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18923
18924 @item
18925 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18926 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18927 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18928
18929 @item
18930 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18931 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18932
18933 @item
18934 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18935 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18936 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18937
18938 @item
18939 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18940 stopping point.
18941 @end itemize
18942
18943 @node Conclusion, the-the, Debugging, Top
18944 @chapter Conclusion
18945
18946 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18947 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18948 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18949 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18950
18951 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18952 teach yourself.
18953
18954 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18955 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18956 easy to use that we have not touched.
18957
18958 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18959 and in
18960 @ifnotinfo
18961 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18962 @end ifnotinfo
18963 @ifinfo
18964 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18965 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18966 @end ifinfo
18967
18968 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18969 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18970 figure out or find out what it does.
18971
18972 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18973 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18974 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18975 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18976 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18977 on-line and as a typeset, printed book.)
18978
18979 Go to the other on-line help that is part of GNU Emacs: the on-line
18980 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18981 the program that takes you to sources.
18982
18983 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18984 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18985 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18986 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18987 function, for example, looks complicated.
18988
18989 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18990 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18991 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18992 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18993 need to read all the functions. According to
18994 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18995 102 words and symbols.
18996
18997 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18998 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18999 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
19000
19001 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
19002 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
19003 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
19004
19005 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
19006 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
19007 function. This gives you the function documentation.
19008
19009 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
19010 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
19011 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
19012 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
19013 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
19014
19015 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
19016 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
19017 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
19018 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
19019 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
19020 (@code{find-tag}).
19021
19022 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
19023 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
19024 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
19025
19026 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
19027 it is a `built-in' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
19028 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
19029
19030 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
19031 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
19032 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
19033 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
19034 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
19035
19036 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
19037 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
19038
19039 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
19040 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
19041 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
19042 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
19043 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
19044 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
19045 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
19046 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
19047 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
19048
19049 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
19050 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
19051 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
19052 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
19053 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
19054 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
19055 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
19056
19057 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
19058 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
19059 beginning.
19060
19061 @c ================ Appendix ================
19062
19063 @node the-the, Kill Ring, Conclusion, Top
19064 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
19065 @findex the-the
19066 @cindex Duplicated words function
19067 @cindex Words, duplicated
19068
19069 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
19070 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
19071 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
19072 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
19073
19074 @need 1250
19075 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
19076 search for duplicates:
19077
19078 @smallexample
19079 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
19080 @end smallexample
19081
19082 @noindent
19083 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
19084 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
19085 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
19086 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
19087 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
19088 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
19089 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
19090 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
19091 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
19092
19093 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
19094 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
19095 such as the two occurrences of `th' in `with the'.
19096
19097 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
19098 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
19099 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
19100 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
19101
19102 @smallexample
19103 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
19104 @end smallexample
19105
19106 @noindent
19107 Again, not useful.
19108
19109 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
19110 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
19111 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
19112 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
19113
19114 @smallexample
19115 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
19116 @end smallexample
19117
19118 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
19119 expression is good enough, so I use it.
19120
19121 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
19122 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
19123
19124 @smallexample
19125 @group
19126 (defun the-the ()
19127 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
19128 (interactive)
19129 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
19130 (push-mark)
19131 @end group
19132 @group
19133 ;; This regexp is not perfect
19134 ;; but is fairly good over all:
19135 (if (re-search-forward
19136 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
19137 (message "Found duplicated word.")
19138 (message "End of buffer")))
19139 @end group
19140
19141 @group
19142 ;; Bind `the-the' to C-c \
19143 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
19144 @end group
19145 @end smallexample
19146
19147 @sp 1
19148 Here is test text:
19149
19150 @smallexample
19151 @group
19152 one two two three four five
19153 five six seven
19154 @end group
19155 @end smallexample
19156
19157 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
19158 function definition and try each of them on this list.
19159
19160 @node Kill Ring, Full Graph, the-the, Top
19161 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
19162 @cindex Kill ring handling
19163 @cindex Handling the kill ring
19164 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
19165
19166 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
19167 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
19168 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
19169
19170 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
19171 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
19172 consider the workings of the kill ring.
19173
19174 @menu
19175 * What the Kill Ring Does::
19176 * current-kill::
19177 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
19178 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
19179 * ring file::
19180 @end menu
19181
19182 @node What the Kill Ring Does, current-kill, Kill Ring, Kill Ring
19183 @ifnottex
19184 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
19185 @end ifnottex
19186
19187 @need 1250
19188 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
19189 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
19190 evaluate the following:
19191
19192 @smallexample
19193 @group
19194 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
19195 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
19196 @end group
19197 @end smallexample
19198
19199 @noindent
19200 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
19201 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
19202 it with @kbd{M-w}.
19203
19204 @noindent
19205 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
19206 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
19207 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
19208 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
19209 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
19210 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
19211 end you put point or mark.)
19212
19213 @need 1250
19214 @noindent
19215 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
19216 fill the kill ring:
19217
19218 @smallexample
19219 @group
19220 first some text
19221 second piece of text
19222 third line
19223 fourth line of text
19224 fifth bit of text
19225 @end group
19226 @end smallexample
19227
19228 @need 1250
19229 @noindent
19230 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
19231
19232 @smallexample
19233 kill-ring
19234 @end smallexample
19235
19236 @need 800
19237 @noindent
19238 It is:
19239
19240 @smallexample
19241 @group
19242 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
19243 "third line" "second piece of text")
19244 @end group
19245 @end smallexample
19246
19247 @noindent
19248 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
19249
19250 @need 1250
19251 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
19252
19253 @smallexample
19254 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
19255 @end smallexample
19256
19257 @node current-kill, yank, What the Kill Ring Does, Kill Ring
19258 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19259 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
19260 @findex current-kill
19261
19262 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
19263 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
19264 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
19265 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
19266 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
19267 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
19268 and @code{kill-region}.)
19269
19270 @menu
19271 * Code for current-kill::
19272 * Understanding current-kill::
19273 @end menu
19274
19275 @node Code for current-kill, Understanding current-kill, current-kill, current-kill
19276 @ifnottex
19277 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
19278 @end ifnottex
19279
19280
19281 @need 1500
19282 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19283 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19284
19285 @smallexample
19286 @group
19287 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19288 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19289 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19290 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19291 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19292 @end group
19293 @group
19294 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19295 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19296 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19297 interprogram-paste-function
19298 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19299 @end group
19300 @group
19301 (if interprogram-paste
19302 (progn
19303 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19304 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19305 ;; selection, with identical text.
19306 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19307 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19308 interprogram-paste)
19309 @end group
19310 @group
19311 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19312 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19313 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19314 (length kill-ring))
19315 kill-ring)))
19316 (or do-not-move
19317 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19318 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19319 @end group
19320 @end smallexample
19321
19322 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19323 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19324 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19325 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19326 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19327
19328 @need 1500
19329 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19330 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19331
19332 @smallexample
19333 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19334 @end smallexample
19335
19336 @node Understanding current-kill, , Code for current-kill, current-kill
19337 @ifnottex
19338 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19339 @end ifnottex
19340
19341 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19342 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19343 skeletal form:
19344
19345 @smallexample
19346 @group
19347 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19348 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19349 (let @var{varlist}
19350 @var{body}@dots{})
19351 @end group
19352 @end smallexample
19353
19354 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19355 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19356
19357 @menu
19358 * Body of current-kill::
19359 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19360 * Determining the Element::
19361 @end menu
19362
19363 @node Body of current-kill, Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19364 @ifnottex
19365 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19366 @end ifnottex
19367
19368 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19369 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19370
19371 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19372 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19373 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19374 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19375 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19376 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19377 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19378 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19379
19380 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19381 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19382
19383 @need 2000
19384 Let us consider the `if not' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19385 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19386 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19387 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19388
19389 @smallexample
19390 @group
19391 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19392 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19393 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19394 (length kill-ring))
19395 kill-ring)))
19396 (or do-not-move
19397 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19398 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19399 @end group
19400 @end smallexample
19401
19402 @noindent
19403 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19404 signals an error.
19405
19406 @need 1000
19407 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19408 with an @code{if}:
19409
19410 @findex zerop
19411 @findex error
19412 @smallexample
19413 @group
19414 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19415 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19416 ;; No else-part
19417 @end group
19418 @end smallexample
19419
19420 @noindent
19421 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19422 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19423 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19424 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19425
19426 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19427 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19428 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19429 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19430 is similar to the @code{message} function
19431 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19432 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19433 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19434 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19435 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19436
19437 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19438 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19439 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19440
19441 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19442 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19443 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19444 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19445
19446 @node Digression concerning error, Determining the Element, Body of current-kill, Understanding current-kill
19447 @ifnottex
19448 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word `error'
19449 @end ifnottex
19450
19451 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19452 the term `error' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19453 term would be `cancel'. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19454 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19455 from the point of view of the computer, the word `error' is correct.
19456 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19457 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19458 exploration.
19459
19460 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19461 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19462 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19463 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19464 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19465 takes the same steps as it does when there is an `error', a term such as
19466 `cancel' would have a clearer connotation.
19467
19468 @node Determining the Element, , Digression concerning error, Understanding current-kill
19469 @ifnottex
19470 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19471 @end ifnottex
19472
19473 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19474 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19475 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19476 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19477
19478 @need 800
19479 The code looks like this:
19480
19481 @smallexample
19482 @group
19483 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19484 (length kill-ring))
19485 kill-ring)))
19486 @end group
19487 @end smallexample
19488
19489 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19490 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19491 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19492 That is what the
19493 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19494 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19495 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19496 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19497 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19498
19499 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19500 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19501 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19502
19503 @need 800
19504 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19505
19506 @smallexample
19507 @group
19508 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19509
19510 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19511 @end group
19512 @end smallexample
19513
19514 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19515 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19516
19517 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19518 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19519
19520 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19521 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19522 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19523 sign as the second argument.
19524
19525 @need 800
19526 Thus,
19527
19528 @smallexample
19529 @group
19530 (mod 12 4)
19531 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19532 (mod 13 4)
19533 @result{} 1
19534 @end group
19535 @end smallexample
19536
19537 @need 1250
19538 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19539 That is fine.
19540
19541 @smallexample
19542 @group
19543 (mod 0 4)
19544 @result{} 0
19545 (mod 1 4)
19546 @result{} 1
19547 @end group
19548 @end smallexample
19549
19550 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19551 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19552 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19553 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19554
19555 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19556 @code{current-kill} function.
19557
19558 @need 1250
19559 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19560 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19561 following:
19562
19563 @smallexample
19564 @group
19565 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19566 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19567 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19568 '("fourth line of text"
19569 "third line"
19570 "second piece of text"
19571 "first some text"))
19572 @end group
19573 @end smallexample
19574
19575 @need 1250
19576 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19577 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19578 element.
19579
19580 @smallexample
19581 @group
19582 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19583 '("fourth line of text"
19584 "third line"
19585 "second piece of text"
19586 "first some text"))
19587 @end group
19588 @end smallexample
19589
19590 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19591 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19592 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19593 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19594 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19595 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19596 Local variables can only be accessed
19597 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19598 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19599
19600 @ignore
19601 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19602 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19603 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
19604 @end ignore
19605
19606 @node yank, yank-pop, current-kill, Kill Ring
19607 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19608 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19609 @findex yank
19610
19611 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19612 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19613
19614 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19615 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19616 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19617 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19618
19619 @need 1250
19620 The code looks like this:
19621
19622 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19623 @smallexample
19624 @group
19625 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19626 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19627 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19628 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19629 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19630 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19631 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19632
19633 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19634 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19635 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19636
19637 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19638 @end group
19639 @group
19640 (interactive "*P")
19641 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19642 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19643 ;; for the following command.
19644 (setq this-command t)
19645 (push-mark (point))
19646 @end group
19647 @group
19648 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19649 ((listp arg) 0)
19650 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19651 (t (1- arg)))))
19652 (if (consp arg)
19653 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19654 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19655 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19656 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19657 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19658 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19659 @end group
19660 @group
19661 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19662 (if (eq this-command t)
19663 (setq this-command 'yank))
19664 nil)
19665 @end group
19666 @end smallexample
19667
19668 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19669 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19670 it.
19671
19672 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19673 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19674 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19675 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19676 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19677
19678 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19679 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19680 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19681
19682 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19683 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19684 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19685 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19686 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19687 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19688 function.)
19689
19690 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19691
19692 @node yank-pop, ring file, yank, Kill Ring
19693 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19694 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19695 @findex yank-pop
19696
19697 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19698 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19699 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19700
19701 @c GNU Emacs 22
19702 @smallexample
19703 @group
19704 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19705 "@dots{}"
19706 (interactive "*p")
19707 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19708 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19709 @end group
19710 @group
19711 (setq this-command 'yank)
19712 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19713 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19714 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19715 @end group
19716 @group
19717 (if before
19718 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19719 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19720 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19721 @end group
19722 @group
19723 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19724 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19725 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19726 ;; if possible.
19727 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19728 @end group
19729 @group
19730 (if before
19731 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19732 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19733 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19734 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19735 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19736 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19737 (point)
19738 (current-buffer))))))
19739 nil)
19740 @end group
19741 @end smallexample
19742
19743 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19744 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19745 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19746 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19747 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19748 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19749
19750 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19751 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19752 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19753 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19754 replaced.
19755
19756 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19757 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19758 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19759 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19760
19761 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19762
19763 @node ring file, , yank-pop, Kill Ring
19764 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19765 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19766 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19767
19768 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19769 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19770 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19771 because they were written earlier.
19772
19773 @node Full Graph, Free Software and Free Manuals, Kill Ring, Top
19774 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19775
19776 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19777 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19778 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19779 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19780 body itself.
19781
19782 @menu
19783 * Labeled Example::
19784 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19785 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19786 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19787 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19788 @end menu
19789
19790 @node Labeled Example, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph, Full Graph
19791 @ifnottex
19792 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19793 @end ifnottex
19794
19795 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19796 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19797 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19798 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19799
19800 @enumerate
19801 @item
19802 Set up code.
19803
19804 @item
19805 Print Y axis.
19806
19807 @item
19808 Print body of graph.
19809
19810 @item
19811 Print X axis.
19812 @end enumerate
19813
19814 @need 800
19815 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19816
19817 @smallexample
19818 @group
19819 10 -
19820 *
19821 * *
19822 * **
19823 * ***
19824 5 - * *******
19825 * *** *******
19826 *************
19827 ***************
19828 1 - ****************
19829 | | | |
19830 1 5 10 15
19831 @end group
19832 @end smallexample
19833
19834 @noindent
19835 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19836 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19837 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19838
19839 @smallexample
19840 @group
19841 5 - *
19842 * ** *
19843 *******
19844 ********** **
19845 1 - **************
19846 | ^ |
19847 Jan June Jan
19848 @end group
19849 @end smallexample
19850
19851 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19852 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19853 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19854 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19855 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19856
19857 @need 1200
19858 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19859 @code{print-graph} function:
19860
19861 @smallexample
19862 @group
19863 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19864 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19865 (let ((height @dots{}
19866 @dots{}))
19867 @end group
19868 @group
19869 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19870 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19871 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19872 @end group
19873 @end smallexample
19874
19875 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19876 in turn.
19877
19878 @node print-graph Varlist, print-Y-axis, Labeled Example, Full Graph
19879 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19880 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19881 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19882
19883 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19884 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19885 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19886 contents of its documentation string.)
19887
19888 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19889 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19890 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19891 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19892 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19893 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19894 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19895
19896 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19897 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19898 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19899 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19900 previous chapter.
19901
19902 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19903 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19904 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19905
19906 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19907 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19908
19909 @smallexample
19910 @group
19911 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19912 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19913 @end group
19914 @end smallexample
19915
19916 @noindent
19917 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19918
19919 @need 2000
19920 @node print-Y-axis, print-X-axis, print-graph Varlist, Full Graph
19921 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
19922 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19923 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19924 @cindex Y axis printing
19925 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19926 @cindex Print vertical axis
19927
19928 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19929 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19930
19931 @smallexample
19932 @group
19933 10 -
19934
19935
19936
19937
19938 5 -
19939
19940
19941
19942 1 -
19943 @end group
19944 @end smallexample
19945
19946 @noindent
19947 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19948 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19949
19950 @menu
19951 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19952 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19953 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19954 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19955 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19956 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19957 @end menu
19958
19959 @node print-Y-axis in Detail, Height of label, print-Y-axis, print-Y-axis
19960 @ifnottex
19961 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19962 @end ifnottex
19963
19964 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19965 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19966 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19967 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19968 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19969 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19970 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19971 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19972 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19973 five.
19974
19975 @node Height of label, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis in Detail, print-Y-axis
19976 @ifnottex
19977 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19978 @end ifnottex
19979
19980 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19981 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19982 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19983 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19984 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19985 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19986
19987 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19988 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19989 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19990 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19991 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19992 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19993 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19994 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19995 is required.
19996
19997 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19998 divided into several smaller problems.
19999
20000 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
20001 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
20002 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
20003
20004 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
20005 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
20006 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
20007 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
20008 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
20009 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
20010 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
20011 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
20012
20013 @node Compute a Remainder, Y Axis Element, Height of label, print-Y-axis
20014 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
20015
20016 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
20017 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
20018 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
20019 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
20020 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
20021 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
20022 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
20023 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
20024 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
20025
20026 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
20027 expressions:
20028
20029 @smallexample
20030 @group
20031 (% 7 5)
20032
20033 (% 10 5)
20034 @end group
20035 @end smallexample
20036
20037 @noindent
20038 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
20039
20040 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
20041 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
20042 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
20043
20044 @smallexample
20045 @group
20046 (zerop (% 7 5))
20047 @result{} nil
20048
20049 (zerop (% 10 5))
20050 @result{} t
20051 @end group
20052 @end smallexample
20053
20054 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
20055 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
20056
20057 @smallexample
20058 (zerop (% height 5))
20059 @end smallexample
20060
20061 @noindent
20062 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
20063 'max numbers-list)}.)
20064
20065 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
20066 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
20067 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
20068 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
20069 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
20070 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
20071 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
20072 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
20073 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
20074 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
20075
20076 @smallexample
20077 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
20078 @end smallexample
20079
20080 @noindent
20081 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
20082
20083 @smallexample
20084 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
20085 @end smallexample
20086
20087 All through this discussion, we have been using `five' as the value
20088 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
20089 value. For generality, we should replace `five' with a variable to
20090 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
20091 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20092
20093 @need 1250
20094 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
20095 following:
20096
20097 @smallexample
20098 @group
20099 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20100 height
20101 ;; @r{else}
20102 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20103 Y-axis-label-spacing))
20104 @end group
20105 @end smallexample
20106
20107 @noindent
20108 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
20109 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
20110 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
20111 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
20112
20113 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
20114 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
20115 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
20116 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
20117
20118 @smallexample
20119 @group
20120 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
20121 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
20122 @end group
20123
20124 @group
20125 @dots{}
20126 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20127 (height-of-top-line
20128 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20129 height
20130 @end group
20131 @group
20132 ;; @r{else}
20133 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20134 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20135 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
20136 @dots{}
20137 @end group
20138 @end smallexample
20139
20140 @noindent
20141 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
20142 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
20143 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
20144 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
20145 more about @code{let*}.)
20146
20147 @node Y Axis Element, Y-axis-column, Compute a Remainder, print-Y-axis
20148 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
20149
20150 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
20151 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
20152 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
20153 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
20154 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
20155 include a leading blank space before the number.
20156
20157 @findex number-to-string
20158 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
20159 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
20160 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
20161 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
20162 For example,
20163
20164 @smallexample
20165 @group
20166 (length (number-to-string 35))
20167 @result{} 2
20168
20169 (length (number-to-string 100))
20170 @result{} 3
20171 @end group
20172 @end smallexample
20173
20174 @noindent
20175 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
20176 see this alternative name in various sources.)
20177
20178 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
20179 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
20180 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
20181
20182 @vindex Y-axis-tic
20183 @smallexample
20184 @group
20185 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
20186 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
20187 @end group
20188 @end smallexample
20189
20190 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
20191 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
20192
20193 @smallexample
20194 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
20195 @end smallexample
20196
20197 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
20198 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
20199 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
20200
20201 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
20202 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
20203 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
20204 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
20205 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
20206 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
20207 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
20208
20209 @smallexample
20210 @group
20211 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
20212 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
20213 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
20214 and is padded as needed so all line up with
20215 the element for the largest number."
20216 @end group
20217 @group
20218 (let* ((leading-spaces
20219 (- full-Y-label-width
20220 (length
20221 (concat (number-to-string number)
20222 Y-axis-tic)))))
20223 @end group
20224 @group
20225 (concat
20226 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20227 (number-to-string number)
20228 Y-axis-tic)))
20229 @end group
20230 @end smallexample
20231
20232 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
20233 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
20234
20235 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
20236 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
20237 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
20238
20239 @findex make-string
20240 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
20241 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
20242 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
20243 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
20244 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
20245 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
20246 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
20247 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
20248
20249 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
20250 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
20251 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
20252
20253 @node Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis Penultimate, Y Axis Element, print-Y-axis
20254 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
20255
20256 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
20257 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
20258 as the label for the vertical axis:
20259
20260 @findex Y-axis-column
20261 @smallexample
20262 @group
20263 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
20264 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
20265 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
20266 (let (Y-axis)
20267 @group
20268 @end group
20269 (while (> height 1)
20270 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20271 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20272 (setq Y-axis
20273 (cons
20274 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
20275 Y-axis))
20276 @group
20277 @end group
20278 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20279 (setq Y-axis
20280 (cons
20281 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20282 Y-axis)))
20283 (setq height (1- height)))
20284 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20285 (setq Y-axis
20286 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20287 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20288 @end group
20289 @end smallexample
20290
20291 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20292 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20293 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20294 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20295 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20296 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20297 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20298
20299 @need 2000
20300 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate, , Y-axis-column, print-Y-axis
20301 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20302
20303 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20304 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20305
20306 @findex print-Y-axis
20307 @smallexample
20308 @group
20309 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20310 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20311 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20312 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20313 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20314 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
20315 @end group
20316 @group
20317 (let ((start (point)))
20318 (insert-rectangle
20319 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20320 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20321 (goto-char start)
20322 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20323 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20324 @end group
20325 @end smallexample
20326
20327 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20328 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20329 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20330 the graph.
20331
20332 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20333
20334 @enumerate
20335 @item
20336 Install
20337
20338 @smallexample
20339 @group
20340 Y-axis-label-spacing
20341 Y-axis-tic
20342 Y-axis-element
20343 Y-axis-column
20344 print-Y-axis
20345 @end group
20346 @end smallexample
20347
20348 @item
20349 Copy the following expression:
20350
20351 @smallexample
20352 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20353 @end smallexample
20354
20355 @item
20356 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20357 want the axis labels to start.
20358
20359 @item
20360 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20361
20362 @item
20363 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20364 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20365
20366 @item
20367 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20368 @end enumerate
20369
20370 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20371 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20372 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20373 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20374
20375 @need 2000
20376 @node print-X-axis, Print Whole Graph, print-Y-axis, Full Graph
20377 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20378 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20379 @cindex X axis printing
20380 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20381 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20382
20383 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20384 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20385
20386 @smallexample
20387 @group
20388 | | | |
20389 1 5 10 15
20390 @end group
20391 @end smallexample
20392
20393 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20394 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20395 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20396 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20397
20398 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20399 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20400 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20401
20402 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20403 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20404 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20405 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20406
20407 @menu
20408 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20409 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20410 @end menu
20411
20412 @node Similarities differences, X Axis Tic Marks, print-X-axis, print-X-axis
20413 @ifnottex
20414 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20415 @end ifnottex
20416
20417 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20418 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20419 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20420 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20421 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20422
20423 This is a three step process:
20424
20425 @enumerate
20426 @item
20427 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20428
20429 @item
20430 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20431
20432 @item
20433 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20434 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20435 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20436 @end enumerate
20437
20438 @node X Axis Tic Marks, , Similarities differences, print-X-axis
20439 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20440
20441 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20442 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20443
20444 @smallexample
20445 @group
20446 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20447 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20448 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20449 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20450 @end group
20451 @end smallexample
20452
20453 @noindent
20454 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20455 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20456 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20457 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20458 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20459 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20460 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20461
20462 @need 1200
20463 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20464
20465 @smallexample
20466 @group
20467 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20468 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20469 @end group
20470 @end smallexample
20471
20472 @need 1250
20473 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20474
20475 @smallexample
20476 | | | |
20477 @end smallexample
20478
20479 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20480 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20481
20482 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20483 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20484 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20485
20486 @need 1250
20487 The code looks like this:
20488
20489 @smallexample
20490 @group
20491 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20492 @dots{}
20493 (concat
20494 (make-string
20495 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20496 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20497 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20498 ? )
20499 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20500 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20501 @dots{}
20502 @end group
20503 @end smallexample
20504
20505 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20506 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20507 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20508
20509 @need 1250
20510 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20511 looks like this:
20512
20513 @smallexample
20514 @group
20515 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20516 @dots{}
20517 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20518 @dots{}
20519 @end group
20520 @end smallexample
20521
20522 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20523 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20524 axis:
20525
20526 @smallexample
20527 @group
20528 ;; X-length
20529 @dots{}
20530 (length numbers-list)
20531 @end group
20532
20533 @group
20534 ;; tic-width
20535 @dots{}
20536 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20537 @end group
20538
20539 @group
20540 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20541 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20542 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20543 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20544 @end group
20545 @end smallexample
20546
20547 @need 1250
20548 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20549
20550 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20551 @smallexample
20552 @group
20553 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20554 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20555 "Print ticks for X axis."
20556 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20557 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20558 @end group
20559 @group
20560 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20561 (insert (concat
20562 (make-string
20563 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20564 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20565 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20566 ? )
20567 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20568 @end group
20569 @group
20570 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20571 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20572 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20573 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20574 @end group
20575 @end smallexample
20576
20577 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20578
20579 @need 1250
20580 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20581
20582 @findex X-axis-element
20583 @smallexample
20584 @group
20585 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20586 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20587 (let ((leading-spaces
20588 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20589 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20590 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20591 (number-to-string number))))
20592 @end group
20593 @end smallexample
20594
20595 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20596 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20597
20598 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20599 @smallexample
20600 @group
20601 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20602 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20603 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20604 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20605 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20606 (insert "1")
20607 @end group
20608 @group
20609 (insert (concat
20610 (make-string
20611 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20612 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20613 ? )
20614 (number-to-string number)))
20615 @end group
20616 @group
20617 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20618 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20619 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20620 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20621 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20622 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20623 @end group
20624 @end smallexample
20625
20626 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20627 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20628 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20629
20630 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20631 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20632 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20633 separates the two lines.
20634
20635 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20636 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20637
20638 @findex print-X-axis
20639 @smallexample
20640 @group
20641 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20642 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20643 (let* ((leading-spaces
20644 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20645 @end group
20646 @group
20647 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20648 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20649 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20650 @end group
20651 @group
20652 (X-tic
20653 (concat
20654 (make-string
20655 @end group
20656 @group
20657 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20658 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20659 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20660 ? )
20661 @end group
20662 @group
20663 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20664 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20665 @end group
20666 @group
20667 (tic-number
20668 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20669 (/ X-length tic-width)
20670 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20671 @end group
20672 @group
20673 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20674 (insert "\n")
20675 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20676 @end group
20677 @end smallexample
20678
20679 @need 1250
20680 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20681
20682 @enumerate
20683 @item
20684 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20685 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20686 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20687
20688 @item
20689 Copy the following expression:
20690
20691 @smallexample
20692 @group
20693 (progn
20694 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20695 (symbol-width 1))
20696 (print-X-axis
20697 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20698 @end group
20699 @end smallexample
20700
20701 @item
20702 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20703 want the axis labels to start.
20704
20705 @item
20706 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20707
20708 @item
20709 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20710 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20711
20712 @item
20713 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20714 @end enumerate
20715
20716 @need 1250
20717 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20718 @sp 1
20719
20720 @smallexample
20721 @group
20722 | | | | |
20723 1 5 10 15 20
20724 @end group
20725 @end smallexample
20726
20727 @node Print Whole Graph, , print-X-axis, Full Graph
20728 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20729 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20730 @cindex Whole graph printing
20731 @cindex Graph, printing all
20732
20733 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20734
20735 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20736 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20737 Axes}), but with additions.
20738
20739 @need 1250
20740 Here is the outline:
20741
20742 @smallexample
20743 @group
20744 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20745 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20746 (let ((height @dots{}
20747 @dots{}))
20748 @end group
20749 @group
20750 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20751 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20752 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20753 @end group
20754 @end smallexample
20755
20756 @menu
20757 * The final version:: A few changes.
20758 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20759 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20760 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20761 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20762 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20763 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20764 @end menu
20765
20766 @node The final version, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph, Print Whole Graph
20767 @ifnottex
20768 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20769 @end ifnottex
20770
20771 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20772 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20773 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20774 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20775 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20776
20777 @need 1500
20778 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20779 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20780 this:
20781
20782 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20783 @smallexample
20784 @group
20785 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20786 (defun Y-axis-column
20787 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20788 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20789 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20790 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20791 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20792 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20793 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20794 that each line is five units of the graph."
20795 @end group
20796 @group
20797 (let (Y-axis
20798 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20799 (while (> height 1)
20800 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20801 @end group
20802 @group
20803 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20804 (setq Y-axis
20805 (cons
20806 (Y-axis-element
20807 (* height number-per-line)
20808 width-of-label)
20809 Y-axis))
20810 @end group
20811 @group
20812 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20813 (setq Y-axis
20814 (cons
20815 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20816 Y-axis)))
20817 (setq height (1- height)))
20818 @end group
20819 @group
20820 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20821 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20822 (or vertical-step 1)
20823 width-of-label)
20824 Y-axis))
20825 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20826 @end group
20827 @end smallexample
20828
20829 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20830 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20831 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20832
20833 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20834 @smallexample
20835 @group
20836 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20837 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20838 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20839 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20840 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20841 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20842 @end group
20843 @group
20844 (let (from-position)
20845 (while numbers-list
20846 (setq from-position (point))
20847 (insert-rectangle
20848 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20849 (goto-char from-position)
20850 (forward-char symbol-width)
20851 @end group
20852 @group
20853 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20854 (sit-for 0)
20855 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20856 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20857 (forward-line height)
20858 (insert "\n")))
20859 @end group
20860 @end smallexample
20861
20862 @need 1250
20863 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20864
20865 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20866 @smallexample
20867 @group
20868 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20869 (defun print-graph
20870 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20871 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20872 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20873 @end group
20874
20875 @group
20876 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20877 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20878 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20879 each row is five units."
20880 @end group
20881 @group
20882 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20883 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20884 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20885 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20886 @end group
20887 @group
20888 (height-of-top-line
20889 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20890 height
20891 ;; @r{else}
20892 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20893 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20894 @end group
20895 @group
20896 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20897 (full-Y-label-width
20898 (length
20899 @end group
20900 @group
20901 (concat
20902 (number-to-string
20903 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20904 Y-axis-tic))))
20905 @end group
20906
20907 @group
20908 (print-Y-axis
20909 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20910 @end group
20911 @group
20912 (graph-body-print
20913 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20914 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20915 @end group
20916 @end smallexample
20917
20918 @node Test print-graph, Graphing words in defuns, The final version, Print Whole Graph
20919 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20920
20921 @need 1250
20922 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20923
20924 @enumerate
20925 @item
20926 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20927 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20928 rest of the code.)
20929
20930 @item
20931 Copy the following expression:
20932
20933 @smallexample
20934 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20935 @end smallexample
20936
20937 @item
20938 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20939 want the axis labels to start.
20940
20941 @item
20942 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20943
20944 @item
20945 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20946 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20947
20948 @item
20949 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20950 @end enumerate
20951
20952 @need 1250
20953 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20954
20955 @smallexample
20956 @group
20957 10 -
20958
20959
20960 *
20961 ** *
20962 5 - **** *
20963 **** ***
20964 * *********
20965 ************
20966 1 - *************
20967
20968 | | | |
20969 1 5 10 15
20970 @end group
20971 @end smallexample
20972
20973 @need 1200
20974 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20975 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20976
20977 @smallexample
20978 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20979 @end smallexample
20980
20981 @need 1250
20982 @noindent
20983 The graph looks like this:
20984
20985 @smallexample
20986 @group
20987 20 -
20988
20989
20990 *
20991 ** *
20992 10 - **** *
20993 **** ***
20994 * *********
20995 ************
20996 2 - *************
20997
20998 | | | |
20999 1 5 10 15
21000 @end group
21001 @end smallexample
21002
21003 @noindent
21004 (A question: is the `2' on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
21005 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a `1' instead, (or
21006 even a `0'), you can modify the sources.)
21007
21008 @node Graphing words in defuns, lambda, Test print-graph, Print Whole Graph
21009 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
21010
21011 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
21012 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
21013 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
21014 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
21015
21016 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
21017 requisite code.
21018
21019 @need 1500
21020 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
21021 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
21022 following:
21023
21024 @smallexample
21025 @group
21026 (setq top-of-ranges
21027 '(10 20 30 40 50
21028 60 70 80 90 100
21029 110 120 130 140 150
21030 160 170 180 190 200
21031 210 220 230 240 250
21032 260 270 280 290 300)
21033 @end group
21034 @end smallexample
21035
21036 @noindent
21037 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
21038
21039 @need 1500
21040 @noindent
21041 Evaluate the following:
21042
21043 @smallexample
21044 @group
21045 (setq list-for-graph
21046 (defuns-per-range
21047 (sort
21048 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
21049 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
21050 t ".+el$"))
21051 '<)
21052 top-of-ranges))
21053 @end group
21054 @end smallexample
21055
21056 @noindent
21057 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
21058 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
21059 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
21060
21061 @smallexample
21062 @group
21063 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
21064 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
21065 @end group
21066 @end smallexample
21067
21068 @noindent
21069 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
21070 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
21071 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
21072 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
21073
21074 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
21075 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
21076
21077 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
21078 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
21079 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
21080 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
21081
21082 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
21083 one-fiftieth its present value.
21084
21085 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
21086 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
21087
21088 @smallexample
21089 @group
21090 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21091 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
21092 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21093 @end group
21094 @end smallexample
21095
21096 @node lambda, mapcar, Graphing words in defuns, Print Whole Graph
21097 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
21098 @cindex Anonymous function
21099 @findex lambda
21100
21101 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
21102 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
21103 include its whole body.
21104
21105 @need 1250
21106 @noindent
21107 Thus,
21108
21109 @smallexample
21110 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21111 @end smallexample
21112
21113 @noindent
21114 is a function definition that says `return the value resulting from
21115 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50'.
21116
21117 @need 1200
21118 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
21119 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
21120 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
21121 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
21122
21123 @smallexample
21124 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
21125 @end smallexample
21126
21127 @noindent
21128 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Special Form}.)
21129
21130 @need 1250
21131 @noindent
21132 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
21133
21134 @c !!! Clear print-postscript-figures if the computer formatting this
21135 @c document is too small and cannot handle all the diagrams and figures.
21136 @c clear print-postscript-figures
21137 @c set print-postscript-figures
21138 @c lambda example diagram #1
21139 @ifnottex
21140 @smallexample
21141 @group
21142 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21143 \_______________/ ^
21144 | |
21145 function argument
21146 @end group
21147 @end smallexample
21148 @end ifnottex
21149 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21150 @sp 1
21151 @tex
21152 @center @image{lambda-1}
21153 %%%% old method of including an image
21154 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21155 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-1.eps}}
21156 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21157 @end tex
21158 @sp 1
21159 @end ifset
21160 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21161 @iftex
21162 @smallexample
21163 @group
21164 (multiply-by-seven 3)
21165 \_______________/ ^
21166 | |
21167 function argument
21168 @end group
21169 @end smallexample
21170 @end iftex
21171 @end ifclear
21172
21173 @noindent
21174 This expression returns 21.
21175
21176 @need 1250
21177 @noindent
21178 Similarly, we can write:
21179
21180 @c lambda example diagram #2
21181 @ifnottex
21182 @smallexample
21183 @group
21184 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21185 \____________________________/ ^
21186 | |
21187 anonymous function argument
21188 @end group
21189 @end smallexample
21190 @end ifnottex
21191 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21192 @sp 1
21193 @tex
21194 @center @image{lambda-2}
21195 %%%% old method of including an image
21196 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21197 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-2.eps}}
21198 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21199 @end tex
21200 @sp 1
21201 @end ifset
21202 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21203 @iftex
21204 @smallexample
21205 @group
21206 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
21207 \____________________________/ ^
21208 | |
21209 anonymous function argument
21210 @end group
21211 @end smallexample
21212 @end iftex
21213 @end ifclear
21214
21215 @need 1250
21216 @noindent
21217 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
21218
21219 @c lambda example diagram #3
21220 @ifnottex
21221 @smallexample
21222 @group
21223 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21224 \______________________/ \_/
21225 | |
21226 anonymous function argument
21227 @end group
21228 @end smallexample
21229 @end ifnottex
21230 @ifset print-postscript-figures
21231 @sp 1
21232 @tex
21233 @center @image{lambda-3}
21234 %%%% old method of including an image
21235 % \input /usr/local/lib/tex/inputs/psfig.tex
21236 % \centerline{\psfig{figure=/usr/local/lib/emacs/man/lambda-3.eps}}
21237 % \catcode`\@=0 %
21238 @end tex
21239 @sp 1
21240 @end ifset
21241 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
21242 @iftex
21243 @smallexample
21244 @group
21245 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
21246 \______________________/ \_/
21247 | |
21248 anonymous function argument
21249 @end group
21250 @end smallexample
21251 @end iftex
21252 @end ifclear
21253
21254 @noindent
21255 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
21256 divides that number by 50.
21257
21258 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21259 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
21260 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
21261
21262 @node mapcar, Another Bug, lambda, Print Whole Graph
21263 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
21264 @findex mapcar
21265
21266 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
21267 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
21268 a sequence.
21269
21270 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
21271 `mapping over a domain', meaning to apply a function to each of the
21272 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
21273 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
21274 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
21275 first of a list.
21276
21277 @need 1250
21278 @noindent
21279 For example,
21280
21281 @smallexample
21282 @group
21283 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
21284 @result{} (3 5 7)
21285 @end group
21286 @end smallexample
21287
21288 @noindent
21289 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
21290 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
21291
21292 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
21293 all the remaining.
21294 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
21295 @code{apply}.)
21296
21297 @need 1250
21298 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
21299 anonymous function:
21300
21301 @smallexample
21302 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21303 @end smallexample
21304
21305 @noindent
21306 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21307 @code{list-for-graph}.
21308
21309 @need 1250
21310 The whole expression looks like this:
21311
21312 @smallexample
21313 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21314 @end smallexample
21315
21316 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21317 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21318
21319 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21320 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21321 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21322
21323 @smallexample
21324 @group
21325 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21326 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21327 @end group
21328 @end smallexample
21329
21330 @need 1250
21331 The resulting list looks like this:
21332
21333 @smallexample
21334 @group
21335 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21336 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21337 @end group
21338 @end smallexample
21339
21340 @noindent
21341 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21342 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21343 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21344 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21345
21346 @node Another Bug, Final printed graph, mapcar, Print Whole Graph
21347 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21348 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21349 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21350
21351 I said `almost ready to print'! Of course, there is a bug in the
21352 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21353 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21354 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21355 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21356
21357 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21358 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21359 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21360 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21361 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21362 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21363 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21364 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21365
21366 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21367 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21368 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21369 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21370 a little thought.
21371
21372 @need 1250
21373 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21374
21375 @smallexample
21376 @group
21377 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21378 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21379 &optional horizontal-step)
21380 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21381 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21382 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21383 @end group
21384 @group
21385 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21386 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21387 (delete-char
21388 (- (1-
21389 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21390 (insert (concat
21391 (make-string
21392 @end group
21393 @group
21394 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21395 (- (* symbol-width
21396 X-axis-label-spacing)
21397 (1-
21398 (length
21399 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21400 2)
21401 ? )
21402 (number-to-string
21403 (* number horizontal-step))))
21404 @end group
21405 @group
21406 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21407 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21408 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21409 (insert (X-axis-element
21410 (* number horizontal-step)))
21411 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21412 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21413 @end group
21414 @end smallexample
21415
21416 @need 1500
21417 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21418 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21419 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21420 (the full text is too much to print).
21421
21422 @iftex
21423 @smallexample
21424 @group
21425 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21426 @dots{}
21427 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21428 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21429 @end group
21430 @end smallexample
21431
21432 @smallexample
21433 @group
21434 (defun print-graph
21435 (numbers-list
21436 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21437 @dots{}
21438 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21439 @end group
21440 @end smallexample
21441 @end iftex
21442
21443 @ifnottex
21444 @smallexample
21445 @group
21446 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21447 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21448 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21449 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21450 each column."
21451 @end group
21452 @group
21453 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21454 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21455 (let* ((leading-spaces
21456 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21457 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21458 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21459 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21460 @end group
21461 @group
21462 (X-tic
21463 (concat
21464 (make-string
21465 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21466 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21467 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21468 ? )
21469 @end group
21470 @group
21471 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21472 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21473 (tic-number
21474 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21475 (/ X-length tic-width)
21476 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21477 @end group
21478
21479 @group
21480 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21481 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21482 (insert "\n")
21483 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21484 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21485 @end group
21486 @end smallexample
21487
21488 @smallexample
21489 @group
21490 (defun print-graph
21491 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21492 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21493 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21494 @end group
21495
21496 @group
21497 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21498 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21499 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21500 each row is five units.
21501 @end group
21502
21503 @group
21504 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21505 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21506 each column."
21507 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21508 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21509 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21510 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21511 @end group
21512 @group
21513 (height-of-top-line
21514 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21515 height
21516 ;; @r{else}
21517 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21518 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21519 @end group
21520 @group
21521 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21522 (full-Y-label-width
21523 (length
21524 (concat
21525 (number-to-string
21526 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21527 Y-axis-tic))))
21528 @end group
21529 @group
21530 (print-Y-axis
21531 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21532 (graph-body-print
21533 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21534 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21535 @end group
21536 @end smallexample
21537 @end ifnottex
21538
21539 @c qqq
21540 @ignore
21541 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21542
21543 @need 1250
21544 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21545
21546 @smallexample
21547 @group
21548 (defvar top-of-ranges
21549 '(10 20 30 40 50
21550 60 70 80 90 100
21551 110 120 130 140 150
21552 160 170 180 190 200
21553 210 220 230 240 250)
21554 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21555 @end group
21556
21557 @group
21558 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21559 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21560 @end group
21561
21562 @group
21563 (defvar graph-blank " "
21564 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21565 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21566 as graph-symbol.")
21567 @end group
21568
21569 @group
21570 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21571 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21572 @end group
21573
21574 @group
21575 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21576 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21577 @end group
21578
21579 @group
21580 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21581 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21582 @end group
21583
21584 @group
21585 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21586 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21587 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21588 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21589 @end group
21590 @end smallexample
21591
21592 @smallexample
21593 @group
21594 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21595 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21596 (beginning-of-defun)
21597 (let ((count 0)
21598 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21599 @end group
21600
21601 @group
21602 (while
21603 (and (< (point) end)
21604 (re-search-forward
21605 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21606 end t))
21607 (setq count (1+ count)))
21608 count))
21609 @end group
21610 @end smallexample
21611
21612 @smallexample
21613 @group
21614 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21615 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21616 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21617 Each number is the number of words or
21618 symbols in one function definition."
21619 @end group
21620
21621 @group
21622 (message "Working on `%s' ... " filename)
21623 (save-excursion
21624 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21625 (lengths-list))
21626 (set-buffer buffer)
21627 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21628 (widen)
21629 (goto-char (point-min))
21630 @end group
21631
21632 @group
21633 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21634 (setq lengths-list
21635 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21636 (kill-buffer buffer)
21637 lengths-list)))
21638 @end group
21639 @end smallexample
21640
21641 @smallexample
21642 @group
21643 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21644 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21645 (let (lengths-list)
21646 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21647 (while list-of-files
21648 (setq lengths-list
21649 (append
21650 lengths-list
21651 @end group
21652 @group
21653 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21654 (lengths-list-file
21655 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21656 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21657 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21658 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21659 lengths-list))
21660 @end group
21661 @end smallexample
21662
21663 @smallexample
21664 @group
21665 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21666 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21667 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21668 (number-within-range 0)
21669 defuns-per-range-list)
21670 @end group
21671
21672 @group
21673 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21674 (while top-of-ranges
21675
21676 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21677 (while (and
21678 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21679 (car sorted-lengths)
21680 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21681
21682 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21683 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21684 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21685 @end group
21686
21687 @group
21688 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21689
21690 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21691 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21692 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21693
21694 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21695 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21696 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21697 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21698 @end group
21699
21700 @group
21701 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21702 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21703 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21704 (cons
21705 (length sorted-lengths)
21706 defuns-per-range-list))
21707
21708 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21709 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21710 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21711 @end group
21712 @end smallexample
21713
21714 @smallexample
21715 @group
21716 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21717 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21718 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21719 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21720 of the list.
21721 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21722 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21723 @end group
21724
21725 @group
21726 (let ((insert-list nil)
21727 (number-of-top-blanks
21728 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21729
21730 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21731 (while (> actual-height 0)
21732 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21733 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21734 @end group
21735
21736 @group
21737 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21738 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21739 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21740 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21741 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21742
21743 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21744 insert-list))
21745 @end group
21746 @end smallexample
21747
21748 @smallexample
21749 @group
21750 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21751 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21752 A numbered element looks like this ` 5 - ',
21753 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21754 the element for the largest number."
21755 @end group
21756 @group
21757 (let* ((leading-spaces
21758 (- full-Y-label-width
21759 (length
21760 (concat (number-to-string number)
21761 Y-axis-tic)))))
21762 @end group
21763 @group
21764 (concat
21765 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21766 (number-to-string number)
21767 Y-axis-tic)))
21768 @end group
21769 @end smallexample
21770
21771 @smallexample
21772 @group
21773 (defun print-Y-axis
21774 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21775 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21776 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21777 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21778 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21779 @end group
21780 @group
21781 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21782 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21783 (let ((start (point)))
21784 (insert-rectangle
21785 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21786 @end group
21787 @group
21788 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21789 (goto-char start)
21790 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21791 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21792 @end group
21793 @end smallexample
21794
21795 @smallexample
21796 @group
21797 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21798 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21799 "Print ticks for X axis."
21800 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21801 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21802 @end group
21803 @group
21804 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21805 (insert (concat
21806 (make-string
21807 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21808 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21809 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21810 ? )
21811 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21812 @end group
21813 @group
21814 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21815 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21816 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21817 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21818 @end group
21819 @end smallexample
21820
21821 @smallexample
21822 @group
21823 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21824 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21825 (let ((leading-spaces
21826 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21827 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21828 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21829 (number-to-string number))))
21830 @end group
21831 @end smallexample
21832
21833 @smallexample
21834 @group
21835 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21836 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21837 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21838 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21839 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21840 @end group
21841 @group
21842 (let (from-position)
21843 (while numbers-list
21844 (setq from-position (point))
21845 (insert-rectangle
21846 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21847 (goto-char from-position)
21848 (forward-char symbol-width)
21849 @end group
21850 @group
21851 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21852 (sit-for 0)
21853 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21854 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21855 (forward-line height)
21856 (insert "\n")))
21857 @end group
21858 @end smallexample
21859
21860 @smallexample
21861 @group
21862 (defun Y-axis-column
21863 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21864 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21865 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21866 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21867 @end group
21868 @group
21869 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21870 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21871 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21872 that each line is five units of the graph."
21873 (let (Y-axis
21874 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21875 @end group
21876 @group
21877 (while (> height 1)
21878 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21879 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21880 (setq Y-axis
21881 (cons
21882 (Y-axis-element
21883 (* height number-per-line)
21884 width-of-label)
21885 Y-axis))
21886 @end group
21887 @group
21888 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21889 (setq Y-axis
21890 (cons
21891 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21892 Y-axis)))
21893 (setq height (1- height)))
21894 @end group
21895 @group
21896 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21897 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21898 (or vertical-step 1)
21899 width-of-label)
21900 Y-axis))
21901 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21902 @end group
21903 @end smallexample
21904
21905 @smallexample
21906 @group
21907 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21908 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21909 &optional horizontal-step)
21910 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21911 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21912 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21913 @end group
21914 @group
21915 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21916 ;; line up number
21917 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21918 (insert (concat
21919 (make-string
21920 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21921 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21922 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21923 2)
21924 ? )
21925 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21926 @end group
21927 @group
21928 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21929 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21930 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21931 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21932 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21933 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21934 @end group
21935 @end smallexample
21936
21937 @smallexample
21938 @group
21939 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21940 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21941 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21942 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21943 each column."
21944 @end group
21945 @group
21946 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21947 ;; are passed by `print-graph'.
21948 (let* ((leading-spaces
21949 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21950 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21951 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21952 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21953 @end group
21954 @group
21955 (X-tic
21956 (concat
21957 (make-string
21958 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21959 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21960 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21961 ? )
21962 @end group
21963 @group
21964 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21965 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21966 (tic-number
21967 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21968 (/ X-length tic-width)
21969 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21970 @end group
21971
21972 @group
21973 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21974 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21975 (insert "\n")
21976 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21977 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21978 @end group
21979 @end smallexample
21980
21981 @smallexample
21982 @group
21983 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21984 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21985 (mapcar '(lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21986 @end group
21987 @end smallexample
21988
21989 @smallexample
21990 @group
21991 (defun print-graph
21992 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21993 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21994 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21995 @end group
21996
21997 @group
21998 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21999 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
22000 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
22001 each row is five units.
22002 @end group
22003
22004 @group
22005 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
22006 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
22007 each column."
22008 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
22009 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
22010 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
22011 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
22012 @end group
22013 @group
22014 (height-of-top-line
22015 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22016 height
22017 ;; @r{else}
22018 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
22019 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
22020 @end group
22021 @group
22022 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
22023 (full-Y-label-width
22024 (length
22025 (concat
22026 (number-to-string
22027 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
22028 Y-axis-tic))))
22029 @end group
22030 @group
22031
22032 (print-Y-axis
22033 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
22034 (graph-body-print
22035 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
22036 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
22037 @end group
22038 @end smallexample
22039 @c qqq
22040 @end ignore
22041
22042 @page
22043 @node Final printed graph, , Another Bug, Print Whole Graph
22044 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
22045
22046 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
22047 like this:
22048 @sp 1
22049
22050 @smallexample
22051 @group
22052 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
22053 @end group
22054 @end smallexample
22055 @sp 1
22056
22057 @noindent
22058 Here is the graph:
22059 @sp 2
22060
22061 @smallexample
22062 @group
22063 1000 - *
22064 **
22065 **
22066 **
22067 **
22068 750 - ***
22069 ***
22070 ***
22071 ***
22072 ****
22073 500 - *****
22074 ******
22075 ******
22076 ******
22077 *******
22078 250 - ********
22079 ********* *
22080 *********** *
22081 ************* *
22082 50 - ***************** * *
22083 | | | | | | | |
22084 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
22085 @end group
22086 @end smallexample
22087
22088 @sp 2
22089
22090 @noindent
22091 The largest group of functions contain 10 -- 19 words and symbols each.
22092
22093 @node Free Software and Free Manuals, GNU Free Documentation License, Full Graph, Top
22094 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
22095
22096 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
22097 @sp 1
22098
22099 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
22100 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
22101 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
22102 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
22103 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
22104 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
22105
22106 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
22107 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
22108 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
22109 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
22110
22111 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
22112 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
22113 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
22114 them from the free software community.
22115
22116 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
22117 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
22118 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
22119 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
22120 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
22121 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
22122 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
22123 so that we cannot use it.
22124
22125 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
22126 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
22127
22128 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
22129 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
22130 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
22131 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
22132 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
22133 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
22134 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
22135 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
22136 problems.
22137
22138 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
22139 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
22140 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
22141 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
22142 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
22143
22144 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
22145 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
22146 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
22147 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
22148 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
22149 views.
22150
22151 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
22152 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
22153 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
22154 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
22155 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
22156 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
22157 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
22158 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
22159
22160 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
22161 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
22162 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
22163 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
22164 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
22165 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
22166 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
22167 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
22168
22169 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
22170 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
22171 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
22172 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
22173
22174 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
22175 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
22176 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
22177 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
22178
22179 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
22180 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
22181 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
22182 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
22183 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
22184
22185 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
22186 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
22187 change that.
22188
22189 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
22190 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
22191 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
22192 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
22193 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
22194 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
22195
22196 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
22197 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
22198 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
22199 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
22200 he must above all make it free.
22201
22202 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
22203 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
22204 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
22205 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
22206
22207 @sp 2
22208 @noindent
22209 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
22210 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
22211 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
22212
22213 @node GNU Free Documentation License, Index, Free Software and Free Manuals, Top
22214 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
22215
22216 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
22217 @include doclicense.texi
22218
22219 @node Index, About the Author, GNU Free Documentation License, Top
22220 @comment node-name, next, previous, up
22221 @unnumbered Index
22222
22223 @ignore
22224 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
22225 @end ignore
22226
22227 @printindex cp
22228
22229 @iftex
22230 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
22231
22232 @tex
22233 \par\vfill\supereject
22234 \ifodd\pageno
22235 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22236 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22237 %\page\hbox{}\page
22238 \else
22239 % \par\vfill\supereject
22240 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
22241 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
22242 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22243 %\page\hbox{}%\page
22244 \fi
22245 @end tex
22246
22247 @c page
22248 @w{ }
22249
22250 @c ================ Biographical information ================
22251
22252 @w{ }
22253 @sp 8
22254 @center About the Author
22255 @sp 1
22256 @end iftex
22257
22258 @ifnottex
22259 @node About the Author, , Index, Top
22260 @unnumbered About the Author
22261 @end ifnottex
22262
22263 @quotation
22264 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
22265 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
22266 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
22267 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
22268 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
22269 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
22270 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
22271 airplane.
22272 @end quotation
22273
22274 @c @page
22275 @c @w{ }
22276 @c
22277 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
22278 @c @tex
22279 @c \par\vfill\supereject
22280 @c @end tex
22281
22282 @c @iftex
22283 @c @headings off
22284 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
22285 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
22286 @c @end iftex
22287
22288 @bye